JP2024040353A - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine capable of awarding a moderate profit to a player. [Solution] When a game round resulting in a jackpot is completed, the game transitions to an open/close execution mode. In the open/close execution mode, a special electric winning device is opened and closed, and a game ball enters the special electric winning device, and a game ball is paid out. The total number of rounds of play executed in the open/close execution mode during the advantageous period is measured by a total round number counter 64c. When the value of the total round number counter 64c becomes equal to or greater than a first reference value, the game ball launch cycle is changed to a longer cycle. Also, when the value of the total round number counter 64c becomes equal to or greater than the first reference value, the duration of fluctuation of the game rounds is extended. Also, when a game round resulting in a predetermined jackpot occurs in a situation where the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than a third reference value, the duration of fluctuation of the game rounds becomes the longest period. [Selected Figure] Figure 6

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Further, a general configuration is such that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding pachinko machines, a lottery is held based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, and a fluctuating pattern is displayed on the display surface of the display device. A known configuration is known in which, when a winning result is obtained, a specific combination of symbols, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is entered. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device (for example, (See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2011-125488

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is preferable that a moderate amount of profit be given to the player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can provide players with appropriate profits.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a benefit granting means for granting a profit to a player based on the occurrence of a profit granting event as a result of playing a game;
situation determining means for determining subsequent gaming situations according to the player's advantage;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a moderate profit to a player.

It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the symbol display device. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the display content on the display surface of a pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table for the 1st special figure, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table for the 2nd special figure. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows firing control processing in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation start processing in main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating acquisition processing of a fluctuation duration period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special figure fluctuation in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure confirmation process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows processing during special electricity release in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special electric line closure in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special call termination process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in audio-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows main side command correspondence processing in audio-light side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing cycle setting processing in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of the performance pattern in sound-light side MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a data table for a game round performance that is selected when a small winning result is not obtained. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the movie image dedicated to the longest period displayed on the symbol display device, and (b) is a time chart showing the timing at which display of the remaining time image starts. (a) to (c) are time charts for explaining how symbols are displayed variably in the symbol row of the symbol display device. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a data table for game performance. (a) A flowchart illustrating a final stop period selection process in the main MPU, (b) a flowchart illustrating an opening period selection process in the main MPU, and (c) a flowchart illustrating an interval period selection process in the main MPU. (d) is a flowchart showing an ending period selection process in the main MPU. (a) to (e) If the opening/closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any gaming times in the low-frequency support mode, 12 is a time chart showing how regulations regarding the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode occur in stages. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition regarding discharge of the game ball which flowed down the game field in a 2nd embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of main side RAM used for managing a ball payout rate. It is a flowchart which shows the ball payout rate monitoring process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows ball entrance management processing in main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing cycle setting processing in the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration period in the master MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in main side MPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the special figure determination process performed by the main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for demonstrating the storage area of the main side RAM. 3 is a flowchart showing cycle setting processing in the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a process for obtaining a fluctuation duration period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in main side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a base arrangement table in a 4th embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an additional arrangement table. It is a flowchart which shows the period adjustment process in main side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first base arrangement table in a fifth embodiment, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second base arrangement table, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a third base arrangement table. (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the fourth base arrangement table. 3 is a flowchart illustrating acquisition processing of a fluctuation duration period in the main MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing a process for obtaining a fluctuation duration period executed by the main MPU in the sixth embodiment. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a period table for normal use, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a period table for shortening. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first base arrangement table in a seventh embodiment, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second base arrangement table, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a third base arrangement table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining. It is a flowchart which shows the special call termination process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure confirmation process in main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating acquisition processing of a fluctuation duration period in the main MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing settings for each of a non-restricted situation, a first restricted situation, and a second restricted situation. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure determination process performed by the main side MPU in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure determination process performed by the main side MPU in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special call termination process in main side MPU.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in FIG. 2, the configuration within the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. . The outer frame 11 is constructed by connecting wooden boards on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island equipment. It should be noted that the outer frame 11 is not an essential component of the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility of a game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 11. Specifically, when viewed from the front, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation tip side.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip end when viewed from the front.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be explained based on FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and these inner rail portions 25 and outer rail portions 26 provide guidance means. The guide rail is configured as follows. A game ball fired from a game ball firing mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

Incidentally, the game ball firing mechanism 27 includes a firing rail 27a that extends toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a, and a ball feeding device 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a (described later) onto the firing rail 27a. The solenoid 27c is an electric actuator that fires the game balls supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided at the lower right corner of the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and the game ball is fired.

As shown in FIG. 1, the firing operation device 28 is provided to protrude forward from the base surface of the front door frame 14, and includes an operation base 29a and an operation handle 29b. The operation handle 29b is formed in an annular shape and is rotatably supported by the operation base 29a while being sandwiched between the front and rear sides of the operation base 29a. The rotation axis of the operating handle 29b is in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and there is a portion on the outer circumferential surface of the operating handle 29b on which the player's finger is applied when rotating the operating handle 29b. The operating handle 29b is biased toward the initial position by a spring (not shown), and is rotated to the right against the biasing force by being rotated toward the right by the player. Then, as the amount of rotation toward the right side increases, the firing strength of the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 becomes stronger.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings passing through it in the front and back direction. Each opening includes a general winning opening 31, a special winning winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a common drawing unit 38, and a round display section 39. etc. are provided respectively.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, if one game ball enters the first operating port 33 or one game ball enters the second operating port 34, In this case, when one game ball is paid out and one game ball enters the general winning hole 31, ten game balls are paid out and sent to the special electric winning device 32. When one game ball enters the game ball, payout of 15 game balls is executed.

Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 may have a smaller number of winning balls than the first operating port 33. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of prize balls is greater than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the gaming area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 has a large number of nails 24b planted therein in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the fluid continues to flow down the gaming area PA without being discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 will be used. The landing of a game ball into a ball is also expressed as winning a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are installed in the game board 24 as a unit as an operating port device. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are open upward. Further, both the operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second actuating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric utility object 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second operating hole 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side of the second operating port 34 in the downstream direction of the game ball. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the through gate 35 in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after winning the prize. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning in the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held triggered by winning in the through gate 35, and a general figure display of the normal figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass through in the gaming area PA. A changing display of the picture is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a power open winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuating display of the general figure display section 38a is ended, the state shifts to the general electric power open state. In the general power open state, the general power accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

Note that the general figure display section 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, etc. , CRT or other types of display devices such as a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns that are variably displayed on the general figure display section 38a include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

In the general drawing unit 38, a general drawing holding display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the general drawing display section 38a. The number of game balls that have entered the through gate 35 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the regular game reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is held using the win at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly displayed through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special symbol unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

In detail about the special figure unit 37, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a and a second special figure display section 37b. The display area of the first special figure display section 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and similarly, the display area of the second special figure display section 37b is narrower than the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the total area of the display area of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b is also smaller than the display surface 41a.

In the first special figure display section 37a, a winning lottery is carried out with the winning of the first actuation port 33 as a trigger, and thereby a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display is carried out. Then, the results corresponding to the lottery results are displayed. In addition, in the second special figure display section 37b, a winning lottery is performed using winning in the second actuation port 34 as a trigger, and thereby a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the results corresponding to the lottery results are displayed.

Note that the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b are constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner, but they are not limited to this. Instead, it may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, the patterns displayed on the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, and a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed. Possible configurations include a configuration in which , or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure reservation display part 37c and a second special figure reservation display part 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b. . The number of game balls entered into the first actuation port 33 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display section 37c. In addition, the number of game balls entered into the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting the second special figure reservation display section 37d.

In detail about the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 90, which will be described later. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may also be a dot matrix display device. It's okay.

In the symbol display device 41, when a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display is performed on the first special symbol display section 37a based on a winning in the first operating port 33, a variable display or a predetermined display of symbols is performed in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol. At the same time, when a variable display of a symbol or a predetermined display is performed on the second special symbol display section 37b based on a prize entered into the second operating port 34, a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol is performed in accordance with that. . In addition, the symbol display device 41 not only displays a display effect triggered by winning the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also displays a display effect during the opening/closing execution mode, which will be described later, which will be shifted to after winning. will be held.

Display contents when symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing individual symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in Figures 4(a) to 4(j), the designs, which are a type of picture, include nine main designs numbered from "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped picture. It is composed of sub-designs consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set as a plurality of display areas: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface 41a, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), on the display surface 41a, three symbols are displayed in a stopped state for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It looks like this. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5(a), five effective lines are set on the display surface 41a, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. .

When a variable display of symbols is performed on the display surface 41a based on winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scroll periodically in a predetermined direction. The variable display starts as follows. Then, basically, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and finally a state in which a predetermined symbol is displayed statically in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. It ends with. In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display ends, if the result of the internal lottery is a 5R high-probability jackpot result, a 10R low-probability jackpot result, or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, the same one on any active line. If a combination of odd numbered symbols or a combination of the same even numbered symbols is formed, and the result of the internal lottery is a 2R high certainty jackpot result or small hit result described later, a predetermined symbol will be placed on any active line. A combination (for example "3-4-1") is formed.

In addition, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, variable display is started on either of the special symbol display sections 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41, and ends after displaying a predetermined result. The period up to this point corresponds to one game round. Further, the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 are not limited to the above-mentioned symbols, and for example, only numbers may be displayed in a variable manner as the symbols.

If a jackpot or a small win is won in the winning lottery based on the prize entered into the first operation port 33, the system shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which winning into the special electric winning device 32 becomes possible. Similarly, when a jackpot or small win is won in the winning lottery based on a prize entered into the second actuating port 34, the system shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which winning into the special electric winning device 32 becomes possible.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 3, the special electric winning device 32 is equipped with a grand prize opening (not shown) that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32a that opens and closes the grand prize opening. The opening/closing door 32a is placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, but if the transition to the opening/closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery, it can be switched to the open state in which game balls can win prizes. It has become. Incidentally, the opening/closing execution mode is a mode to which the game will transition in the event of a winning result. Note that in the closed state, it is not impossible to win a prize, but it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state.

The round display section 39 displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode. Here, the opening/closing execution mode includes a round number regulation mode that occurs when a jackpot is won, and an opening/closing number regulation mode that occurs when a small hit is won. The round number regulation mode is an opening/closing execution mode that is executed with a predetermined number of round games as the upper limit. A round game is a game that continues until either one of the following conditions is met: a predetermined opening duration period elapses, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the special electric winning device 32. That's true. The number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode differs depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 displays the number of times the round game is played or a display corresponding thereto. Further, the display on the round display section 39 is started when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and is ended when the opening/closing execution mode is ended and a new game round is started. On the other hand, in the opening/closing number regulation mode, the round game is not set, the number of openings and closings of the special electric winning device 32 becomes the upper limit number, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the prize in the special electric winning device 32. The contract will be terminated based on either one of the conditions being met. In the opening/closing number regulation mode, the round display section 39 is maintained in a non-display state.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 configured as described above is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window 51 that allows almost the entire area of the gaming area PA to be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting section 53 is provided above the window section 51. Further, a pair of left and right speaker sections 54 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56, which bulge toward the front side, are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls put out by a payout device 76 to be described later, and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 55a.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 housed in a board box. Note that the substrate box may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or may be provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. Examples of such trace means include the structure of a joint that connects multiple case bodies that make up a board box inseparably and requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating them, and the adhesive layer that remains on the target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted across the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box can be considered.

A back pack unit 15 is installed to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of transparent synthetic resin, and a dispensing mechanism section 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

The payout mechanism section 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls put out by the payout device 76 are delivered to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The dispensing mechanism section 73 is supplied with a main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power on and off.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 that has a function of controlling the payout device 76, and a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and outputted, and is also used to generate and output electricity when the player operates the firing operation device 28. It is equipped with a power supply/launch control device 78 that controls the launch of game balls. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 77 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 . The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 62, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built-in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 62, and each may be integrated into separate chips. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power outage monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and a payout control device 77 is also connected. A power supply/launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power outage monitoring board 65, and power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power outage monitoring board 65.

Various sensors such as various prize detection sensors 66a to 66e are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The various winning detection sensors 66a to 66e are provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the winning ball entry parts such as the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35. A detection sensor is included, and the MPU 62 determines whether or not each ball has won a prize. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes various lottery drawings based on winnings at the first operating port 33 or winnings at the second operating port 34.

A power outage monitoring board 65, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 80 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the winning determination result in the winning ball entering section. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the audio emission control device 80. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Note that the MPU 62 transmits commands to the audio emission control device 80 through parallel communication.

On the output side of the MPU 62, there are a drive unit 32b for special electricity that opens and closes the opening/closing door 32a of the special electricity prize winning device 32, a drive unit 34b for general electricity that opens and closes the general electricity accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, and a drive unit 34b for general electricity that opens and closes the opening/closing door 32a of the special electricity winning device 32. A figure unit 37, a general figure unit 38, and a round display section 39 are connected. By the way, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a, a second special figure display section 37b, a first special figure reservation display section 37c, and a second special figure reservation display section 37d. are all connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the general drawing unit 38 is provided with a general drawing display section 38a and a general drawing holding display section 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the general electric utility object 34a is won, the drive control of the general electric power drive unit 34b is executed in the MPU 62 so that the general electric utility object 34a is opened and closed. Furthermore, during the game round and the opening/closing execution mode, display control of the special figure unit 37 is executed by the MPU 62. In addition, when displaying the lottery result as to whether or not the general electric utility object 34a is to be opened, the display control of the general electric figure unit 38 is executed in the MPU 62. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, display control of the round display section 39 is executed in the MPU 62.

The power outage monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source/launch control device 78, and also monitors the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source/launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

The power source/launch control device 78 is connected to a commercial power source (external power source) in, for example, an amusement hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 61, payout control device 77, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied.

Specifically, regarding the configuration for supplying the operating power, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply section 78a for power-on and a power supply section 78b for power-off. The power source unit 78a is connected to a commercial power source in, for example, an amusement hall, and generates operating power and supplies the generated operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power source. It has the function of The power supply section 78b for during power outage is made of a capacitor, and receives the power supplied from the power supply section 78a for power on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state (when power is being supplied from an external power source). is charged by In addition, in a power cutoff state (when the power supply from an external power supply is cut off) such as when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when a power outage occurs in the commercial power supply, the main power supply unit 78b discharges electricity. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the control device 60 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 77. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 and the RAM of the payout control device 77 will not be erased while backup power is supplied from the power supply section 78b during power outage. Memory is retained.

Here, the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 temporarily stores information on the current gaming state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout control device 77 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. be done. In this case, by supplying backup power to these RAMs from the power supply section 78b during power outage as described above, even if there is no power supply from the power supply section 78a during power on, the current game It becomes possible to store and hold the status, game progress details, and unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, backup power is not supplied to the audio emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 from the power supply section 78b during power outage. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the audio emission control device 80 and the RAM 94 of the display control device 90 will not be backed up, and will be destroyed or will be deleted.

The capacity of the power supply unit 78b during power outage is ensured to be relatively large, and the information stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 before the power is shut off is retained for a predetermined period (for example, one or two days). Ru. The power supply section 78b for use during power outage is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, there is no need to store power in the power supply section 78b during power outage when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the ON state, but it is necessary to replace the battery periodically.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply section (not shown) for use during a power outage, which is different from the power supply section 78b for use during a power outage. In the power supply/launch control device 78, even after the stable 24 volt DC power source falls below 22 volts, the control system is maintained for a sufficient period of time to perform power outage processing by discharging from the power supply section for power outage. It is configured to maintain the 5 volt output, which is the driving power source, at a normal value. This allows the main controller 60 and the like to normally execute and complete the power outage process.

The power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a firing control section 78c in addition to various power supply sections 78a and 78b. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built into the firing operation device 28 are electrically connected to the firing control section 78c.

The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor, and when the player's hand touches the outer surface of the operating handle 29b and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a specified electrical signal corresponding to the handle operation detection is output to the launch control unit 78c. Upon receiving the specified electrical signal, the launch control unit 78c recognizes that the player's hand is touching the outer surface of the operating handle 29b. The launch control unit 78c also determines whether the launch stop switch of the launch operating device 28 has been operated according to the electrical signal received from the push sensor 28b, and determines the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b according to the electrical signal received through the variable resistor 28c.

The firing control unit 78c transmits a condition fulfillment signal (for example, a HI level signal) to the MPU 62 when a predetermined game ball firing condition is satisfied. Specifically, the firing control unit 78c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operating handle 29b is being touched by the player, and also indicating that the firing stop switch is not being manually operated by the player. On the condition that the signal is received from the push sensor 28b, the condition fulfillment signal is continuously transmitted to the MPU 62. Note that if any of the above-mentioned signals is not received, the condition fulfillment signal is not transmitted to the MPU 62 (for example, it becomes a LOW level signal). Further, in addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball rental device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting the condition fulfillment signal.

The MPU 62 transmits a pulsed firing instruction signal to the firing control section 78c when a predetermined firing cycle has elapsed in a situation where the condition fulfillment signal is being received and firing of the game ball can be permitted. When the firing control unit 78c receives a pulsed firing instruction signal from the MPU 62, it drives and controls the game ball firing mechanism 27 once. In this case, if game balls are continuously supplied to the game ball firing mechanism 27, one game ball is fired toward the game area PA every time a predetermined firing cycle elapses. Furthermore, during this firing, the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c, so the game ball is fired with an intensity that corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 29b. Although details will be described later, the predetermined firing cycle is measured by the MPU 62. There are multiple patterns of the predetermined firing cycle, specifically a first cycle that allows firing of 100 game balls per minute, and a second cycle that allows firing of 90 game balls per minute. Two cycles are set, a third cycle that allows for the launch of 80 game balls per minute, and a fourth cycle that allows for the launch of 70 game balls per minute.

The audio emission control device 80 includes an audio emission control board 81 on which an MPU 82 is mounted. The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 82, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83. It has a built-in RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 82 determines the contents of the effects to be executed in the game round, opening/closing execution mode, etc. based on the commands received from the main control device 60. Then, in order to perform an operation corresponding to the determined content, the display light emitting unit 53 provided in the front door frame 14 is controlled to emit light, and the sound output of the speaker unit 54 provided in the front door frame 14 is controlled. I do.

MPU 82 is electrically connected to display control device 90. The MPU 82 transmits to the display control device 90 a command including the content of the performance determined based on the command received from the main control device 60 and a command including the content of the notification corresponding to the command received from the main control device 60. Note that the display control device 90 is not configured to receive commands from the main control device 60 without going through the audio and light emission control device 80, and in relation to the main control device 60, the communication It can be said that it exists on the downstream side of the direction.

The display control device 90 includes a display control board 91 on which an MPU 92 is mounted. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. It has a built-in RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. The MPU 92 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on commands received from the audio emission control device 80 .

Although not shown, the display control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, and also reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 will be referred to as the main side MPU 62, the main side ROM 63, and the main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 82, ROM 83, and RAM 84 of the audio emission control device 80 will be referred to as the sound, respectively. They are referred to as a light-side MPU 82, an audio-optical ROM 83, and an audio-optical RAM 84, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the display control device 90 are referred to as a display-side MPU 92, a display-side ROM 93, and a display-side RAM 94, respectively.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in MPU 62 of main controller 60>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 will be described using FIG. 7.

The main MPU 62 uses various types of counter information during the game to determine the winning lottery, setting the display on the first special symbol display section 37a, setting the display on the second special symbol display section 37b, and setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41. , the display settings of the common figure display section 38a, etc. are performed, and specifically, as shown in FIG. a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3 used for the reach occurrence lottery when the symbol display device 41 comes off and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and each special figure. The display units 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41 use a variation type counter CS that determines the duration of variation in game times. Furthermore, a general electricity random number counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the general electricity accessory 34a of the second actuating port 34 should be placed in the electric role open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 121 of the RAM 64.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the special figure holding area 122 when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs. The special figure holding area 122 includes a first special figure holding area 125, a second special figure holding area 126, and a special figure execution area 127.

The first special drawing holding area 125 includes a first area 125a, a second area 125b, a third area 125c, and a fourth area 125d. Each numerical value information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 125a to 125d as pending information on the first special drawing side. In this case, in the first area 125a to the fourth area 125d, if winnings to the first operating port 33 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 125a → second area 125b → third area 125c → Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the four areas 125d. By providing the four areas 125a to 125d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 can be stored pending storage up to a maximum of four. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the first special drawing holding area 125 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

The second special figure holding area 126 includes a first area 126a, a second area 126b, a third area 126c, and a fourth area 126d. Each numerical value information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 126a to 126d as pending information on the second special drawing side. In this case, in the first area 126a to fourth area 126d, if winnings to the second operating port 34 occur multiple times in a row, the first area 126a → second area 126b → third area 126c → Each piece of numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the four areas 126d. By providing the four areas 126a to 126d in this manner, the winning history of game balls entered into the second operating port 34 can be stored in abeyance at a maximum of four. The number that can be held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. , may be singular.

The special figure execution area 127 stores pending information on targets for which special figure validity judgment, distribution judgment, etc. are to be performed when starting variable display on either of the special figure display sections 37a, 37b. area. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the first special figure display section 37a, the reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure holding area 125 is is moved to the execution area 127. On the other hand, when starting the variable display of the second special figure display section 37b, the holding information on the second special figure side stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure holding area 126 is displayed in the special figure execution area. 127.

The information corresponding to the general random number counter C4 is stored in the general drawing holding area 123 when a winning in the through gate 35 occurs. The general drawing reservation area 123 includes a first area 128a, a second area 128b, a third area 128c, and a fourth area 128d, and the numerical information of the general drawing random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the winning history in the through gate 35. is stored in one of the areas 128a to 128d as pending information on the general figure side. In this case, in the first area 128a to fourth area 128d, if winnings to the through gate 35 occur multiple times in succession, the first area 128a → second area 128b → third area 128c → fourth area Numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of 128d. Since the four areas 128a to 128d are provided in this manner, a maximum of four winning histories of game balls entered into the through gate 35 can be stored on hold. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the general drawing holding area 123 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more; It may be.

The ordinary figure holding area 123 is provided with an execution area 129 for ordinary figures. The ordinary figure execution area 129 is an area in which pending information about objects to be determined for support when starting variable display on the ordinary figure display section 38a is stored. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the ordinary figure display section 38a, the reservation information stored in the first area 128a of the ordinary figure holding area 123 is moved to the ordinary figure execution area 129.

Each of the above counters will be explained in detail.

First, the standard random number counter C4 will be explained. The general random number counter C4 is configured such that, for example, the increment is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The standard random number counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the standard card holding area 123 of the main side RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the general electric utility accessory 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric random number counter C4.

In the present pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the common electric accessory 34a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation where the game ball continues to be launched in the same manner to the game area PA, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is increased per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high or low.

In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electricity release state in the general electricity release lottery using the general electricity random number counter C4 is the same (for example, 4/5 for both), but In the frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric utility object 34a is in the open state when the general electric power open state is won is set to be greater than that in the low frequency support mode, and the one open period is also set to be longer. There is. In this case, when the general power open state is won in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the general power accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is The closing period is set shorter than one opening period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum security period (i.e., The duration of one fluctuation in the display section 38a is set to be short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the first operating port 33 is higher than that in the second operating port 34, but in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize is higher in the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 increases.

Note that the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequently open to the power grid per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, in the power grid release lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the general power open state. In addition, the securing period that is secured between the holding of one general electricity opening lottery and the next general electricity opening lottery (for example, the period of time that is secured on the general electricity lottery display section 38a based on winnings in the through gate 35) In configurations in which multiple types of variable display periods (variable display periods) are prepared, in high-frequency support mode, a shorter security period is more likely to be selected or the average security period is set to be shorter than in low-frequency support mode. Good too. Furthermore, the number of openings may be increased, the opening period may be lengthened, the period of guarantee secured between one general electricity opening lottery and the next general electricity opening lottery may be shortened, or such secured period. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying one or any combination of shortening the average period and increasing the probability of winning.

If the general electricity release state is won in the general electricity release lottery using the general electricity random number counter C4, the general electricity release state will be established. The general electric power open state ends when the general electric accessory object 34a is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the second operating port 34 as a prize. Specifically, the upper limit number is 10 in both the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of opening/closing times of the utility appliance 34a is one in the low-frequency support mode, whereas in the high-frequency support mode, it is opened and closed multiple times, which is more than in the low-frequency support mode. It has been three times. Further, the duration of opening of the utility appliance 34a once is 1 second in the low-frequency support mode, whereas it is 2 seconds in the high-frequency support mode.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be explained. The winning random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first special pattern holding area 125 of the special pattern holding area 122, and the game ball enters the second operating port 34. The winning timing is stored in the second special figure holding area 126 of the special figure holding area 122. Then, a judgment is made using the stored value of the winning random number counter C1.

The value of the random number that becomes the winning result in the determination of success or failure is stored in the main side ROM 63 as a success or failure table. In the win/fail table, a jackpot result, a small win result, and a miss result are set as the win/fail results. The jackpot result is a win/fail result that can trigger a transition to an opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is controlled to open and close, and can trigger a transition to at least one of the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. The small win result is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is controlled to open/close, but does not trigger a transition to both the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode. A losing result is a win/fail result that does not trigger a shift to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a shift to the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode.

As the success/failure tables, there are a success/failure table for low probability mode and a success/failure table for high probability mode. In other words, this pachinko machine 10 uses reservation information on the first special figure side acquired based on winnings in the first operating port 33 and information on the second special figure side acquired based on winnings in the second operating port 34. The same win/fail table is referred to with the pending information, and in any case, there are a low probability mode and a high probability mode as lottery modes in the win/fail lottery.

To explain each win/fail table in detail, in the low probability mode win/fail table, there are two random number values that will result in a jackpot (for example, "5" and "305"), and a random number value that will result in a small win. are three (for example, "55", "355", "555"). The other values are random number values that result in an outlier.

In the high-probability mode win/fail table, the number of random number values that result in a jackpot is set to be larger than in the low-probability mode win/fail table, specifically 20 (for example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", "392", "420" ”, “470”, “495”, “520”, “558”, “575”, “599”). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in a low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot win in a high probability mode. On the other hand, the value of the random number that results in a small win is the same as in the case of the win/fail table for the low probability mode.

In addition, if the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that result in the winning mentioned above can be arbitrary, and in the situation where the low probability mode is used, it is not possible to get a jackpot result. The value group of the winning random number counter C1 may be partially included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that results in a jackpot in a high probability mode, or may not be included. .

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when the game ball enters the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first special pattern holding area 125 of the special pattern holding area 122, and the game ball enters the second operating port 34. The winning timing is stored in the second special figure holding area 126 of the special figure holding area 122. Then, a distribution determination is made using the stored value of the jackpot type counter C2.

Here, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set in this pachinko machine 10, and each of these jackpot results includes (1) the contents of the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the contents of the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode, ( 3) At least one of the three contents, ie, the contents of the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, is different.

The opening/closing execution mode that is executed when a jackpot is won is the round number regulation mode, as already explained. The round number regulation mode includes a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode so that the frequency of winnings in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high or low. is set. Specifically, in this pachinko machine 10, multiple types of opening modes of the special electric winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from when the special electric winning device 32 is opened until it is closed. . Specifically, a long-term mode in which the open duration is set to 29 seconds, which is a long period of time, and a short-term mode, in which the open duration is set to 0.5 seconds, which is a shorter period than the above-mentioned long time, are set. has been done.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game area is fired at a firing cycle of 100 bullets per minute, 90 bullets per minute, 80 bullets per minute, or 70 bullets per minute. The game ball launch mechanism 27 is drive-controlled so that the game ball is launched toward the PA. The shortest firing period is 0.6 seconds and the longest firing period is approximately 0.86 seconds. Furthermore, the upper limit number of end conditions for the round game is set to 10. Then, in the long-term mode among the above-mentioned open modes, the open continuation period is set to be longer than the product of the longest firing cycle of game balls and the upper limit number of one round game. On the other hand, in the short-term mode, the opening duration is shorter than the product of the shortest firing cycle of game balls and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, the opening duration is shorter than the shortest firing cycle of game balls. A period has been set. Therefore, if the Tokuden prize winning device 32 is opened once in a long-term mode, it is expected that the Tokuden prize winning device 32 will receive the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and for a short period of time. If the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in this manner, it is expected that no prizes will be won to the special electric winning device 32. In addition, the open duration period of the short-term mode may be the same or approximately the same as the shortest firing cycle of the game ball, and it may be longer than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball (i.e., the first cycle) and the longest firing cycle of the game ball. The period may be shorter than the firing cycle (ie, the fourth cycle).

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long-term mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short period mode in each round game.

In addition, the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration period for one opening, and the upper limit number of pieces in one round game are the same as those in the high-frequency winning mode. is not limited to the above values and may be set arbitrarily if the frequency of winnings in the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher than that of the low-frequency winning mode. It is.

As already explained, the opening/closing execution mode executed when a small hit is won is the opening/closing number regulation mode. In the opening/closing number regulation mode, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened twice in a short period mode. In this case, the upper limit number of opening/closing number regulation mode termination conditions is set to 10, and the total opening duration of the opening/closing number regulation mode is determined by the shortest firing cycle of game balls and the upper limit number of opening/closing number regulation modes. The time is set to be shorter than the product of Therefore, in the opening/closing number regulation mode, the round game is not executed and it is determined whether or not the number of winnings is the upper limit based on the total number of winnings in the opening/closing number regulation mode. The probability that opening/closing will be executed increases.

The distribution destinations of the types of jackpot results for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored in the main side ROM 63 as a distribution table. The contents of the distribution table will be explained using FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b).

As shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), the distribution table includes the types of jackpot results: 10R low-probability jackpot result, 2R high-probability jackpot result, 5R high-probability jackpot result, and 10R Highly certain jackpot results are set.

In the 10R low-probability jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode in which 10 round games occur. Further, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the low probability mode is set regardless of which winning/losing lottery mode was used before the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. This low probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of which support mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode ends when the number of games played reaches an end standard number of times (specifically, 80 times) set as one or more times after the transition. In this case, it becomes low frequency support mode. The low-frequency support mode that is shifted to after the high-frequency support mode ends continues until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode accordingly. It should be noted that the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode in the opening/closing execution mode, regardless of which jackpot result or small win result is triggered.

In the 2R high-probability jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes a low-frequency winning mode in which two round games occur. In this opening/closing execution mode, it is not expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win a prize, so the number of game balls to be paid out will be substantially zero. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of which winning/losing lottery mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode if the mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, while it becomes the low-frequency support mode if the mode before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode. These support modes continue until the next jackpot result occurs and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the 5R high-probability jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode in which five round games occur. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of which winning/losing lottery mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of which support mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result occurs and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the 10R high sure jackpot result, the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high frequency winning mode in which 10 round games occur. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set regardless of which winning/losing lottery mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high probability mode continues at least until the next jackpot result occurs and the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. Furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of which support mode was used before shifting to the opening/closing execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot result occurs and the game shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b), the distribution table is used to determine the distribution of the reservation information on the first special drawing side acquired based on winnings to the first operating port 33. a distribution table for the first special symbol, and a distribution table for the second special symbol, which is used when determining the distribution of the pending information on the second special symbol obtained based on winnings in the second operating port 34. is provided.

To explain each distribution table in detail, as shown in FIG. 8(a), the distribution table for the first special symbol has 10R low-probability jackpot results as types of jackpot results to be distributed, A 2R high-probability jackpot result, a 5R high-probability jackpot result, and a 10R high-probability jackpot result are set. In the distribution table for the first special drawing, "0-39" corresponds to the 10R low-probability jackpot result, "40-59" corresponds to the 2R high-probability jackpot result, and "60-79" corresponds to the 2R high-probability jackpot result. ” corresponds to the 5R high-probability jackpot result, and “80 to 99” corresponds to the 10R high-probability jackpot result.

Here, in the case of a small winning result, in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by this, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed twice in a short period mode. On the other hand, in the 2R high sure jackpot result, the game shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is played with two times as the upper limit, and in each round game, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed once in a short period mode. In other words, in the case of either a 2R high certainty jackpot result or a small win result, the operation mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode is visually the same. In addition, in the game rounds with these game results, different stop results are displayed in the first special figure display section 37a, but the display area is set larger than that of the first special figure display section 37a. The stop result is displayed on the symbol display device 41 in an indistinguishable manner. Specifically, in any of the above game results, the symbol display device 41 stops displaying a common symbol combination (for example, "3, 4, 1") on any active line. In addition, in the case of a 2R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, during the opening/closing execution mode triggered by that, the opening/closing execution mode is activated when a small hit is achieved based on the winning into the first operating port 33. The effect is executed in a manner that is indistinguishable from the above, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the effect clearly indicating that it is the high probability mode on the symbol display device 41 etc. is not executed, and the operation is performed to the first operating port 33. The performance is executed in the same manner as after the opening/closing execution mode when a small win result is obtained based on the prize winning. In addition, in both cases where a 2R high probability jackpot result or a small win result in the low frequency support mode, the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends becomes the low frequency support mode. With the above configuration, if the opening/closing execution mode which becomes the low frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode which becomes the opening/closing number regulation mode occurs in a situation where the player is in the low probability mode or the low frequency support mode, for example, the player can , the player plays the game while expecting the transition to the high-probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, which increases the interest of the game.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the distribution table for the second special symbol includes 10R low-probability jackpot results, 5R high-probability jackpot results, and 10R high-probability jackpot results as shown in FIG. 8(b). A guaranteed jackpot result is set. In the distribution table for the second special symbol, "0-39" corresponds to the 10R low-probability jackpot result, "40-59" corresponds to the 5R high-probability jackpot result, and "60-99" corresponds to the 5R high-probability jackpot result. ” corresponds to the 10R high sure jackpot result.

The distribution table for the first special symbol and the distribution table for the second special symbol have the same probability of entering the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode in the case of a jackpot win. On the other hand, the probability of being in the high-frequency winning mode in the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the distribution table for the second special symbol than in the distribution table for the first special symbol. More specifically, while the distribution table for the first special figure can be in the low-frequency winning mode, the distribution table for the second special figure cannot be in the low-frequency winning mode. Furthermore, the distribution table for the second special symbol has a higher probability of transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode in which the round game in the high-frequency winning mode occurs 10 times than the distribution table for the first special symbol. Therefore, the type of jackpot result that can be selected in the case of a jackpot win is that the winning occurs at the second operating port 34 rather than the case where a winning occurs at the first operating port 33 and an internal lottery is performed. It is more advantageous for the player if an internal lottery is conducted.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected performance is set as a type of display performance on the symbol display device 41. Expected production is a gaming machine that is equipped with a symbol display device 41 that is capable of displaying symbols in a fluctuating manner, and in which the final stop result is the award corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result. This is a display state that is made to make the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in the award corresponding result after the start of the variable display of symbols and before the stop result is derived and displayed. Specifically, regarding the award correspondence result, combinations of symbols with the same number attached on any active line are stopped and displayed. Two types of expected effects are set: reach display and preview effect.

In the ready-to-reach display, a combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and in this state, the remaining This includes a display state in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a symbol row. In addition, with the combination of ready-to-reach symbols displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a ready-to-reach effect. , those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols are included.

The preview performance includes a situation in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows or a ready-to-reach display after the start of the fluctuating display of symbols on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. This includes a mode in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It also includes a case in which the background screen is set in a predetermined form different from the previous form, and a case in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in a predetermined form different from the previous form. Such a preview performance can occur in any game round when there is a jackpot result or when there is no jackpot result, but it is made to occur with a higher probability when there is a jackpot result than when there is no jackpot result. It is set.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game round in which the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. In addition, in game rounds corresponding to 2R high-probability jackpot results and small win results in which the same symbol combination is not displayed in a stopped manner, the reach display is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, in the game round corresponding to the winning result, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main side ROM 63 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. Reach display is performed when

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the preview performance is not made by the main side MPU 62 but by the sound and light side MPU 82. In this case, the sound/light side MPU 82 executes a lottery process for the preview performance so that the preview performance is more likely to occur in the game round corresponding to the jackpot result than in the game round corresponding to the losing result. Incidentally, this lottery result is reflected when the symbol display device 41 performs a game repeat effect.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS determines the fluctuation continuation period of the game round (the fluctuation continuation period in the first special symbol display section 37a or the second special symbol display section 37b, the fluctuation continuation period of the symbols in the symbol display device 41) in the main side MPU 62. Used in Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS determines the variation pattern at the start of the variation display in the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. Obtained at the time of.

<About the prerequisite processing configuration of the main MPU 62>
Next, each process executed by the main MPU 62 to advance the game will be explained. The processing of the main MPU 62 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, every 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S101, a power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, the main process waits without proceeding to the next process until, for example, 1 sec has elapsed since the main process was started. In the subsequent step S102, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function registers of the main MPU 62 are set.

Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch provided in the power source/launch control device 78 is manually operated, and in the subsequent step S105, the power failure flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1". Determine whether or not there is. In addition, in step S106, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate a checksum, and in the subsequent step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a gaming hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process moves to step S108. Furthermore, if the power-off occurrence information is not set, or if an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process similarly moves to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 64 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is not pressed, on condition that the power outage flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108. Proceed to. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 64, such as initialization of a power outage flag, is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is sent to the voice emission control device 80 in order to make the current gaming state recognized. Send to.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113. In other words, although the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, the remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is non-regular processing that is executed non-regularly.

In the remaining processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10). In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S112, a variation counter update process is executed to update the variation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main side RAM 64, the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the process of overwriting the counter from which it was read is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which generation of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10) is prohibited to a state in which generation is permitted. After executing the process in step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

Here, the hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 62 will be described. The main control board 61 is provided with a clock circuit as a pulse signal output means that outputs a pulse signal at a predetermined period, and is further provided with a clock circuit so as to be located in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 62. A circuit is provided.

The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing means for changing the period of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 62. . In other words, pulse signals are supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 62 at intervals of a specific period of 4 msec. The main MPU 62 executes processing to confirm the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rising or falling edge of the pulse signal, and starts timer interrupt processing with at least one condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. and execute it.

In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where the activation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the main MPU 62, the next timer interrupt process may start 4.1 msec after the previous timer interrupt process started, and when such an event occurs, The next timer interrupt process will start 3.9 msec after the previous timer interrupt process started.

However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of processing in the main MPU 62, the timer interrupt process is basically activated at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 62 is such that even if the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, the processing configuration next to the predetermined timing is In the timer interrupt processing at the timing, the amount exceeding the specific period is absorbed, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

Now, in the timer interrupt process, first in step S201, a power outage information storage process is executed. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power cutoff is received from the power outage monitoring board 65, and if the occurrence of a power outage is identified, a power outage process is executed.

In the following step S202, random number update processing for lottery is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general random number counter C4, and performing a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, Execute processing to overwrite the reading source counter. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it exceeds the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S203, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S111, and in step S204, a variation counter update process is executed as in step S112.

In the subsequent step S205, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1".

In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes from step S207 onwards are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to perform output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b. For example, if information is set to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and if information is set to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the closed state. stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, if information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state, output of a drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b should be started, and the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 should be switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power outage signal and winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S209, winning detection processing is executed. In the winning detection process, the signals received from each winning detection sensor 66a to 66e are read, and the signals to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35 are read. Execute processing to determine whether or not a ball has entered the ball.

In the following step S210, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of multiple types of timer counters provided in the main side RAM 64. In this case, the configuration is such that the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively, but both the subtraction-type timer counter update and the addition-type timer counter update are performed collectively. It may also be a configuration.

In the following step S211, a firing control process for controlling the firing of game balls is executed. The contents of the firing control process will be explained in detail later.

In the subsequent step S212, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S208, the disconnection of each winning detection sensor 66a to 66e and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are confirmed. conduct.

In the subsequent step S213, a special figure special electric control process is executed to control the execution of the game round and the opening/closing execution mode. The contents of the special figure special electric control process will be explained in detail later.

In the following step S214, general electric power control processing is executed. In the regular card/universal card control process, when a winning in the through gate 35 occurs, a process is executed to obtain the numerical information of the general card random number counter C4 as the pending information on the general card side. In addition, when the hold information on the utility map side is acquired in a situation where the variable display of the utility map display section 38a is not performed and the utility vehicle accessory 34a is not in the open state where the utility vehicle is in an open state, uses the reservation information on the general-purpose map side to perform a general-purpose electricity release lottery and to start a variable display on the general-purpose electric diagram display section 38a. The fluctuation display is performed for a predetermined period, and then the outage result corresponding to the result of the general electricity opening lottery is displayed. If the general electricity release state is won in the general electricity release lottery, after the stop result corresponding to the general electricity release state winning is displayed on the general electricity map display section 38a, the general electricity release state is entered, and the general electricity release state is entered. The object 34a is opened in a predetermined manner (that is, the second operating port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner). If the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the utility power opening lottery, display control of the utility map display section 38a, and utility power release state as described above are performed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. If it is a high-frequency support mode, it is performed in a manner corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode, regardless of the type of support mode before the opening/closing execution mode is started and the type of winning result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information is output for reflecting the increase or decrease in the number of pending information related to the first special figure display section 37a on the first special figure pending display section 37c. setting, setting of output information for reflecting the increase or decrease in the number of reservation information related to the second special symbol display section 37b on the second special symbol reservation display section 37d, and setting of output information for reflecting the increase or decrease in the number of reservation information related to the regular symbol display section 38a. Output information to be reflected on the figure pending display section 38b is set. In addition, in step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information is set for updating the display contents of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b. , and sets output information for updating the display contents of the ordinary figure display section 38a. Further, in step S215, output information for updating the display content of the round display section 39 is set based on the processing result of the immediately preceding step S213.

In the subsequent step S216, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and a payout state receiving process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the confirmation result. In addition, in step S217, if the situation is such that the game ball should be paid out based on the ball entering the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, A payout output process is executed to set the prize ball command as an output target in order to execute the payout of the game ball. In the following step S218, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of output of an external signal according to the processing results of various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after executing the processes in steps S207 to S218, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Launching control processing>
Next, the firing control process executed in step S211 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 11.

First, it is determined whether a condition satisfaction signal is received from the launch control section 78c of the power source/launch control device 78 (step S301). As already explained, the firing control unit 78c receives a signal from the touch sensor 28a indicating that the operating handle 29b is being touched by the player, and also receives a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is not being manually operated by the player. is transmitted from the push sensor 28b. If the condition fulfillment signal has not been received (step S301: NO), the period measurement counter 64a (see FIG. 6) provided in the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S302). The period measurement counter 64a is a counter used by the main MPU 62 to determine whether or not the firing period has elapsed in a situation where a condition fulfillment signal is being received from the firing control unit 78c.

If a condition fulfillment signal has been received (step S301: YES), 1 is added to the value of the period measurement counter 64a of the main side RAM 64 (step S303). Then, whether or not the value of the period measurement counter 64a after the addition of 1 is greater than or equal to the value corresponding to the current firing cycle stored in the firing cycle area 64b (see FIG. 6) provided in the main side RAM 64. (Step S304). As already explained, this pachinko machine 10 has multiple firing cycles, specifically the first cycle that allows firing of 100 game balls per minute, and the first cycle that allows firing of 90 game balls per minute. A second cycle that enables the launch of 80 game balls per minute, a third cycle that allows the launch of 70 game balls per minute, and a fourth cycle that allows the launch of 70 game balls per minute are set. There is. The firing cycle area 64b stores information corresponding to any of these first to fourth cycles.

If the value of the cycle measurement counter 64a is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the current firing cycle stored in the firing cycle area 64b (step S304: YES), a pulsed firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c ( Step S305). When the firing control unit 78c receives a pulsed firing instruction signal from the MPU 62, it drives and controls the game ball firing mechanism 27 once. In this case, if the game ball firing mechanism 27 is continuously supplied with game balls, one game ball will be fired toward the game area PA during the firing period measured by the main MPU 62. Ru. Furthermore, during this firing, the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c, so the game ball is fired with an intensity that corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 29b.

If the process of step S302 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S304, or if the process of step S305 is executed, a cycle setting process is executed (step S306). In the cycle setting process, details of which will be described later, are executed to store information corresponding to any of the first to fourth cycles in the firing cycle area 64b.

<Special figure special electric control processing>
Next, the special figure special electric control process executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) of the main side MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 12.

In the special figure special electric control process, when a prize is won to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, a process is executed to obtain reservation information on the special figure side, and a process is executed to obtain reservation information on the special figure side. If the information is stored, a validity determination is made regarding the pending information on the special figure side, and further, using the validity determination as a trigger, a process for performing a game reuse operation is executed. Furthermore, based on the result of the propriety determination, a process for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode is executed after the completion of the game circulation operation, and a process is executed during the opening/closing execution mode and at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Specifically, first, reservation information acquisition processing is executed (step S401). In the acquisition processing, when a winning of a game ball to the first operating port 33 occurs, the number of reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is read out, and the number of reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is read out When the number of reservation information is less than the upper limit value (specifically "4"), each value of the hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 is set in the first special figure reservation area 125. It is stored in the topmost area where the reservation information on the first special figure side is not stored. In addition, in the acquisition processing, when a winning of a game ball to the second operating port 34 occurs, the number of reservation information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 is read out. , when the number of pending information is less than the upper limit value (specifically "4"), each value of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is transferred to the second special figure pending area 126. It is stored in the uppermost area where the reservation information on the second special figure side is not stored.

In the acquisition process, when the hold information on the first special figure side or the hold information on the second special figure side is acquired, a hold command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82. The audio and optical side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the received hold command to the display side MPU 92. By receiving the hold command, the display side MPU 92 changes the display of the number of hold information on the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the hold number. In this case, since the holding command includes information indicating which of the holding information on the first special symbol side and the holding information on the second special symbol side has increased, the symbol display device 41 indicates that the holding information has increased. The display of the number of pending items corresponding to the side that received the request will be changed.

In addition, when the number of pending information increases as described above, in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the first special figure pending display section 37c and the second special figure pending display section Display control is performed on the side of 37d that corresponds to the increase in the number of items on hold so that the display content is changed to correspond to the increase in the number of items on hold.

In the following step S402, the information of the special figure special electric line counter provided in the main side RAM64 is read out, and in step S403, the special figure special electric line address table stored in the main side ROM63 is read out. Then, in step S404, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric line counter is acquired from the special figure special electric line address table.

As already explained, the special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the performance of the game replay and a process for controlling the opening/closing execution mode. The processing for controlling the performance for the game run includes a special figure fluctuation start process (step S406) which is a process for starting the performance for the game run, and a process for advancing the performance for the game run. A process during special figure fluctuation (step S407) and a process during special figure confirmation (step S408) which is a process for ending the performance of the game round are set.

The processing for controlling the opening/closing execution mode includes a special electric line start process (step S409) which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening/closing execution mode, and a process for controlling the open state of the special electric prize winning device 32. The special electric line opening process (step S410), the special electric line closed process (step S411) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 32, the ending of the opening/closing execution mode, and the game at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. A special call termination process (step S412), which is a process for controlling state transition, is set.

The special figure special electric counter is a counter for the main side MPU 62 to grasp which of the plurality of types of processing described above should be executed. The start address of a program for executing the plurality of types of processing described above is set in the special figure/special electric line address table in correspondence with the numerical information of the special figure/special electric line counter.

When the process corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed, the special figure/special electric line counter controls the special figure/special electric line in the next processing time when the conditions for updating the numerical information are satisfied. It is added by 1, added by 2, subtracted by 1, or cleared to "0" depending on the process executed in the process. Therefore, in the special figure special electric line control process in each processing time, it is sufficient to execute the process according to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric line counter. Note that the special figure special electric counter is set to 0 as an initial value.

After executing the process of step S404, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S404 is executed (step S405). Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation start process in step S406, and when the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure fluctuation process in step S407. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure confirmation process in step S408, and if the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special train start process in step S409. If SA4, the process jumps to the special train opening process in step S410, if the acquired start address is SA5, jumps to the special train closed process in step S411, and if the acquired start address is SA6, the process jumps to the special train open process in step S410. The process jumps to the special call termination process in step S412. When any of the processes from step S406 to step S412 is executed, this special figure special electric control process is ended. The processes from step S406 to step S412 will be individually explained below.

<Special figure fluctuation start process>
First, the special symbol fluctuation start process in step S406 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 13.

First, it is determined whether reservation information on the special figure side is stored in either the first special figure holding area 125 or the second special figure holding area 126 (step S501). If a negative determination is made in step S501, the present special symbol variation start process is directly terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S501, the process proceeds to step S502 and data setting processing is executed.

In the data setting process, it is first determined whether the number of pending information on the second special figure side is "0" or not. If the number of reserved pieces in the second special figure holding area 126 is "0", the data setting process for the first special figure is executed, and if the number of reserved pieces in the second special figure holding area 126 is 1 or more, Execute the data setting process for the second special figure.

As already explained, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the reservation information on the special figure side is stored in either the first special figure reservation area 125 or the second special figure reservation area 126. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether the number of reserved pieces in the second special figure holding area 126 is "0" or not, and if it is not "0", that is, the reserved information on the second special figure side is stored. If so, the pending information on the second special figure side is set as the target for starting a game round, regardless of whether the number of pending information on the first special figure side is 1 or more. As a result, when the special figure side holding information is stored in both the first special figure holding area 125 and the second special figure holding area 126, the second special figure side corresponding to the second operating port 34 The pending information will be given priority as a starting target for the game round.

In the data setting process for the first special figure, first, the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure holding area 125 is moved to the execution area 127 for the special figure. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure holding area 125 is executed. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area 125b → first area 125a, third area 125c → second area 125b, fourth area 125d → third area 125c, and then the fourth area Area 125d is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the second special figure flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0". The second special figure flag is a flag for specifying whether the current variable display starts in the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b. Thereafter, a shift command, which is information for making the sound-light side MPU 82 recognize that the data in the first special figure holding area 125 has been shifted, is output, and this data setting process is ended. The sound-light side MPU 82 changes the display of the number of pending information corresponding to the first special figure holding area 125 on the symbol display device 41 to the number of pending pieces by transmitting a command corresponding to the received shift command to the display side MPU 92. Make changes in response to the decrease. In addition, when the number of reservation information in the first special figure reservation area 125 decreases as described above, in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the first special figure reservation display section 37c Display control is performed so that the display content is changed to correspond to the decrease in the number of pending items.

In the second special figure data setting process, first, the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure holding area 126 is moved to the special figure execution area 127. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 126 is executed. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d are sequentially shifted to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area 126b → first area 126a, third area 126c → second area 126b, fourth area 126d → third area 126c, and then the fourth area Area 126d is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the second special figure flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1". Thereafter, a shift command, which is information for making the sound-light side MPU 82 recognize that the data in the second special figure holding area 126 has been shifted, is output, and this data setting process is ended. The sound-light side MPU 82 changes the display of the number of pending information corresponding to the second special figure holding area 126 on the symbol display device 41 to the number of pending pieces by transmitting a command corresponding to the received shift command to the display side MPU 92. Make changes in response to the decrease. In addition, when the number of reservation information in the second special figure reservation area 126 decreases as described above, in the display control process of step S215 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the second special figure reservation display section 37d Display control is performed so that the display content is changed to correspond to the decrease in the number of pending items.

After executing the data setting process (step S502), a validity determination process is executed (step S503). In the win/fail determination process, it is first determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, a winning/failure table for the high probability mode provided in the main side ROM 63 is referred to, and information for judging the winning/failure among the information stored in the execution area 127 for special symbols, that is, a winning random number. It is determined whether the numerical information acquired from the counter C1 matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In addition, in the case of the low probability mode, numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area 127 for special symbols by referring to the win/fail table for the low probability mode provided in the main side ROM 63. It is determined whether or not it matches the low probability jackpot numerical information.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S504: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S505). In the distribution determination process, by determining whether or not the second special figure flag in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1", the current game round is divided into the pending information on the first special figure side and the second special figure side. It is determined which one of the side's hold information corresponds to. Then, the distribution table corresponding to the determination result is divided into the distribution table for the first special symbol (see FIG. 8(a)) and the distribution table for the second special symbol (see FIG. 8(b)). Choose from among them. After selecting the distribution table, the information for distribution judgment among the pending information stored in the special drawing execution area 127, that is, the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2, is used for the selected distribution. To grasp which type of jackpot result corresponds to the minute table. Specifically, when the distribution table for the first special symbol is selected, any jackpot among the 10R low-probability jackpot result, 2R high-probability jackpot result, 5R high-probability jackpot result, and 10R high-probability jackpot result Understand whether you are responding to the results. In addition, when the distribution table for the second special drawing is selected, it is understood which jackpot result it corresponds to among the 10R low-probability jackpot result, 5R high-probability jackpot result, and 10R high-probability jackpot result. do.

Thereafter, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed (step S506). Specifically, information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b in the current game round is stored in the jackpot result stored in advance in the main side ROM 63. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. In this stop result table for jackpot results, the types of patterns that are stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b are set differently for each type of jackpot result. Then, in step S506, information on the pattern mode corresponding to the type of jackpot result specified in step S505 is stored in the main side RAM 64.

Note that information on the type of symbols that are stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this case, the pattern form may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern forms may be set for each jackpot result.

Thereafter, flag setting processing corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S507). Specifically, the main side RAM 64 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, and in step S507, among the flags corresponding to the types of jackpot results, the allocation determination result of step S505 is set. Set the corresponding flag to "1".

If the result of the win/fail determination process is a small win result (step S508: YES), a stop result setting process for the small win result is executed (step S509). Specifically, in this game round, information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b is stored in advance in the main side ROM 63. It is specified from the stop result table for results, and the specified information is stored in the main side RAM 64. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result. Thereafter, the small hit flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S510).

If the result of the success/failure determination process is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result, a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S511). Specifically, information on the mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b in the current game round is stored in advance in the main side ROM 63 as a winning result. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 64. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a jackpot result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of a small win result.

After executing any one of the processes in step S507, step S510, and step S511, a process for obtaining a fluctuation duration period is executed (step S512). The execution period of a game round includes a fluctuation continuation period, which is a period from when the fluctuation display of the symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 starts on the symbol display device 41 until the static display of each symbol starts, and the fluctuation duration period of each symbol. It consists of a final stop period, which is a period from the start of the static display until the end of the static display. In the fluctuating continuation period acquisition process, a process for determining the fluctuating continuation period among the execution periods of the game round to be started this time is executed. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration period.

If the current success/failure determination result is a jackpot result or a small win result (step S601: YES), the current success/failure determination result and distribution determination result become the trigger for execution of the opening/closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode. Determine whether or not the value of the total round number counter 64c (see FIG. 6) provided in the main side RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value for either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result. (Step S602). The total round number counter 64c indicates that a game round is executed in the low-frequency support mode after a jackpot result that triggers a transition to the high-frequency support mode occurs in the normal gaming state, which is the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode. This is a counter for the main MPU 62 to keep track of the total number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode that occurred without any errors. The third reference value is the reference value with the largest number among the multiple types of reference values set, and specifically is "60". The total round number counter 64c and the third reference value will be explained in detail later.

If the current validity determination result and distribution determination result are either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, and the value of the total round number counter 64c is greater than or equal to the third reference value (step S602: YES) , the longest period among the variable continuation periods of the plurality of types of game times set in the pachinko machine 10 is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game time (step S604). In other words, even if it is either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, if the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the third reference value, the process of step S604 will not be executed, Further, even if the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, if this time is any of the 5R high-probability jackpot result, 2R high-probability jackpot result, or small win result, the process of step S604 is executed. Not done. When the process of step S604 is executed, after transmitting the variation command including the information on the longest period and the type command including the current validity judgment result and distribution judgment result to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S615 ), period adjustment processing is executed (step S616).

If this time is neither a 10R low-probability jackpot result nor a 10R high-probability jackpot result, or if the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the third reference value (step S602: NO), the winning time period is read from the main side ROM 63. The table is read (step S603). The winning time period table includes the first winning time period table that is selected in the case of any of the 10R low-probability jackpot result, 5R high-probability jackpot result, and 10R high-probability jackpot result, and the 2R high-probability jackpot result and It also includes a second winning time period table that is selected when the winning result is one of the small winning results.

In the first hit period table, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so that they do not overlap with each other, and each of these groups is In contrast, information regarding the duration of fluctuation in game times is set. In other words, in the first winning time period table, there are multiple types of variations such that the period of fluctuation of the game play that is one of the 10R low-probability jackpot results, 5R high-probability jackpot results, and 10R high-probability jackpot results is relatively long and short. Each of the variation type counters CS from "0 to 198" is assigned to one of the plurality of variation duration periods. By comparing the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614, which will be described later, against the first winning time period table, the information on the fluctuation continuation period corresponding to the numerical information can be determined based on the fluctuation of the current game round. Obtained as duration information.

The first winning time period table has a longer fluctuation duration than the fluctuation duration set in the second winning time period table, the normal period table, and the shortening period table, which will be described later. Therefore, the period of fluctuation for a game round that results in a 10R low-probability jackpot result, 5R high-probability jackpot result, or 10R high-probability jackpot result is the duration of fluctuation for a game round that results in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a small win result. , and the fluctuation continuation period may be longer than the fluctuation continuation period of the game round in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average fluctuation duration according to the first winning period table is the average fluctuation duration according to the second winning period table, the average fluctuation duration according to the normal period table described later, and the average fluctuation duration according to the shortening period table. This period is longer than the period of continuous fluctuation. Therefore, the average duration of fluctuations in the game rounds that result in a 10R low-probability jackpot result, 5R high-probability jackpot result, or 10R high-probability jackpot result is the same as the average period of fluctuation duration for a game play that results in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a small win result. The fluctuation continuation period is longer than the average period of the fluctuation continuation period and the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of game times in which the reach display does not occur.

The fluctuation continuation period set in the first winning time period table is the same as the fluctuation continuation period set in the reach time period table described later. This makes it possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not a jackpot result will occur after the reach display from the period during which the game cycle continues to fluctuate. However, this is not limited to this, and some of the fluctuation durations set in the first winning time period table may be longer than any of all the fluctuation durations set in the reach time period table. A configuration may also be used. In this case, there will be a continuous period of fluctuation in gaming times during which the occurrence of a jackpot result is determined. Further, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times according to the first winning time period table is longer than the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times according to the reach time period table described later. Therefore, the fluctuations in the game times are more likely to continue in a game session where the result is a 10R low-probability jackpot result, a 5R high-probability jackpot result, or a 10R high-probability jackpot result than a game session in which a reach-for-reach display does not result in a jackpot result after the reach display. The period tends to be longer. However, this is not limited to this, and the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of gaming times according to the first winning period table is the same as or approximately the same as the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of gaming times according to the reach period table described later. They may be the same.

Here, the longest period acquired in step S604 is longer than the longest fluctuation continuation period among the fluctuation continuation periods set in the first winning period table. In other words, the longest period acquired in step S604 is longer than any of the variable continuation periods of game times selected in other situations. Therefore, when this time is either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, and the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the period of continuous fluctuation of the game round is the longest period. .

In the second hit period table, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so that they do not overlap with each other, and each of these groups is In contrast, information regarding the duration of fluctuation in game times is set. In other words, in the second winning time period table, multiple types are set so that the period of fluctuation of the game play that results in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a small win result is relatively long or short, and "0~ Each of the 198 variation type counters CS is assigned to one of the plurality of variation duration periods. By comparing the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614, which will be described later, against the second winning time period table, the information on the fluctuation continuation period corresponding to the numerical information can be determined based on the fluctuation of the current game round. Obtained as duration information.

The second winning time period table has a longer fluctuation continuation period than the fluctuation continuation period set in the normal period table and the shortened period table, which will be described later. Therefore, the fluctuation continuation period of a game round that results in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a small win result can be a longer fluctuation continuation period than the fluctuation continuation period of a game round in which no reach display occurs. Further, the average fluctuation continuation period according to the second winning period table is longer than the average fluctuation continuation period according to the normal period table and the average fluctuation continuation period according to the shortening period table, which will be described later. Therefore, the average period of fluctuation continuation period of the game times that result in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a small win result is a longer fluctuation continuation period than the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times in which the reach display does not occur.

If the current success/failure determination result is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result (step S601: NO), it is determined whether or not a miss-reach display occurs in the current game round (step S605). Specifically, out of the information stored in the execution area 127 for special symbols, information for reach determination, that is, numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3, is stored in the main side ROM 63 in advance in the reach occurrence determination table. Determine whether it matches the numerical information set in . If the out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round (step S605: YES), the reach-to-reach period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S606).

In the reach time period table, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so that they do not overlap with each other, and for each of these groups, Information regarding the duration of fluctuation in game times is set. In other words, in the reach time period table, multiple types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game play that is out of reach is relatively long or short, and each of the fluctuation type counters CS from "0 to 198" It is assigned to one of these multiple types of fluctuation duration periods. By comparing the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614, which will be described later, against the relevant reach time period table, the information on the fluctuation continuation period corresponding to the numerical information becomes the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round. is obtained as information.

The reach time period table is set with a longer fluctuation duration than the fluctuation duration set in the second winning time period table, the normal time period table, and the shortened time period table, which will be described later. Therefore, the duration of fluctuations in game times that result in an out-of-reach display is longer than the duration of fluctuations in game times that result in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a small win result, and the duration of fluctuations in game times in which a reach-to-reach display does not occur. It can be a period of fluctuating duration. In addition, the average fluctuation duration according to the reach time period table is the average fluctuation duration according to the second winning time period table, the average fluctuation duration according to the normal period table described later, and the average fluctuation duration according to the shortening period table. The period is longer than the duration. Therefore, the average period of fluctuation continuation of the game times that result in an out-of-reach display is the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of game times that result in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a small win result, and the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of game times that result in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a small win result, and the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of game times that result in a reach-to-reach display. The fluctuation duration is longer than the average duration of the fluctuation duration. On the other hand, as already explained, the fluctuation duration set in the reach time period table is the same as the fluctuation duration set in the first win time period table, and the gaming times according to the reach time period table are the same as the fluctuation duration set in the first win time period table. As already explained, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period is shorter than the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times according to the first winning time period table.

If the out-of-reach display does not occur in the current game round (step S605: NO), the current support is determined by determining whether the high-frequency support flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to It is determined whether the mode is high frequency support mode (step S607). The high frequency support flag is a flag used by the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the situation where the high frequency support flag is set to "1" is the high frequency support mode. The situation where the high frequency support flag is "0" is the low frequency support mode.

If it is the high frequency support mode (step S607: YES), it is determined whether the number of pieces of reservation information on the second special figure side stored on hold in the second special figure holding area 126 is 3 or more ( Step S608). In the high-frequency support mode, as already explained, the frequency with which the utility power accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 becomes open per unit time is relatively high, so the hold information on the second special map side is acquired. It becomes easier. Further, as already explained, the reservation information on the second special figure side is given priority over the reservation information on the first special figure side as a starting target for the game round. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the suspension information on the second special symbol side is configured to change the period table that is referred to in order to determine the fluctuating period of the game play according to the number of suspended and stored pieces. .

If the number of pending storage information on the second special figure side is less than two (step S608: NO), the normal period table is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S609). In the regular period table, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so that they do not overlap with each other, and game play is performed for each of these groups. Information about the duration of fluctuations is set. In other words, in the regular period table, multiple types are set so that the fluctuation duration of game times without winning results and reach display does not occur is relatively long or short, and fluctuation types from "0 to 198" are set. Each of the counters CS is assigned to one of the plurality of types of variation duration periods. By comparing the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS obtained in step S614, which will be described later, against the regular period table, the information on the fluctuation continuation period corresponding to the numerical information becomes the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round. Obtained as information.

When the number of pending storage information on the second special figure side is two or more (step S608: YES), the shortening period table is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S610). In the shortening period table, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so that they do not overlap with each other, and the game is set for each of these groups. Information on the duration of fluctuations is set. In other words, in the shortening period table, multiple types are set so that the fluctuation duration of the game play that does not result in a winning result and the reach display does not occur is relatively long or short, and the fluctuation types from "0 to 198" are set. Each of the counters CS is assigned to one of the plurality of types of variation duration periods. By comparing the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S614, which will be described later, against the shortening period table, the information on the fluctuation duration corresponding to the numerical information can be determined as the fluctuation duration of the current game round. Obtained as information.

The shortening period table has a variable duration period shorter than the variable duration periods set in other period tables including the normal period table. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, if a game round is started in which there is no winning result and no reach display occurs in a situation where two or more pieces of pending information on the second special figure side are stored, other situations The fluctuation duration of the game times can be shorter than the fluctuation duration of the game. Further, the average fluctuation continuation period according to the shortening period table is shorter than the average fluctuation continuation period according to other period tables including the normal period table. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, if a game round is started in which there is no winning result and no reach display occurs in a situation where two or more pieces of pending information on the second special figure side are stored, other situations The average duration of the fluctuation duration of game times is shorter than that.

If it is the low frequency support mode (step S607: NO), it is determined whether the number of pieces of pending information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is 3 or more ( Step S611). In the low-frequency support mode, as already explained, the frequency with which the utility power tool 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively low, so the hold information on the second special map side is not acquired. This makes it easier to acquire the reservation information on the first special figure side than the reservation information on the second special figure side. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the suspension information on the first special symbol side is configured to change the period table that is referred to in order to determine the fluctuating duration of the game play according to the number of suspended and stored pieces. .

If the number of pending storage information on the first special drawing side is less than three (step S611: NO), the normal period table is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S612), and the number of pending storage information on the first special drawing side is If the number of pending storage items is three or more (step S611: YES), the shortening period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S613). The contents of the normal period table and the shortened period table are as described above.

As already explained, the shortening period table has a variable continuation period shorter than the variable continuation periods set in other period tables including the normal period table. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, if a game round is started in which there is no winning result and no reach display occurs in a situation where three or more pieces of pending information on the first special figure side are held and stored, other situations The fluctuation duration of the game times can be shorter than the fluctuation duration of the game. Moreover, as already explained, the average fluctuation continuation period according to the shortening period table is shorter than the average fluctuation continuation period according to other period tables including the normal period table. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, if a game round is started in which there is no winning result and no reach display occurs in a situation where three or more pieces of pending information on the first special figure side are held and stored, other situations The average duration of the fluctuation duration of game times is shorter than that.

If the winning period table is read in step S603, the reach period table is read in step S606, the normal period table is read in step S609, the shortening period table is read in step S610. If the normal period table is read out in step S612, or if the shortened period table is read out in step S613, period acquisition processing is executed (step S614). In the period acquisition process, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, by comparing the acquired numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS against the period table read out as described above, the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round is obtained.

When the process of step S604 is executed, or when the process of step S614 is executed, the variation command including the information on the variation duration of the game session acquired this time, and the type including the current validity judgment result and distribution judgment result The command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S615). Thereafter, period adjustment processing is executed (step S616). The period adjustment process will be explained in detail later.

The fluctuation command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and the duration of the fluctuation of the game. Contains data corresponding to. Specifically, the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data set identification data to indicate that it is a fluctuation command, and the next 4 bits of data are used to determine validity. and lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process are set, and the following 1-bit data determines which of the first special drawing holding area 125 and the second special drawing holding area 126 holding information is set. Trigger data indicating whether the game is triggered is set, and the remaining 7 bits of data set time data corresponding to the continuous period of fluctuation of the game. Therefore, when the sound/light side MPU 82 receives a variation command, it recognizes that it is a variation command from the above-mentioned identification data, and calculates the result of the validity judgment process and the result of the distribution judgment process from the above-mentioned lottery result data. Then, the fluctuation duration of the current game round is recognized from the above-mentioned time data. Here, since the main side MPU 62 selects a varying duration period of a different game time depending on whether or not a reach occurs, even if the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not a reach occurs, the sound and light side The MPU 82 can identify whether or not a reach has occurred based on the information on the period of variation in the number of games played. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating the presence or absence of reach. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach.

The type command has a 2-byte data structure, and the 2-byte data includes data corresponding to the result of the validity judgment process, data corresponding to the result of the distribution judgment process, and whether it is in high probability mode. It includes data indicating whether the mode is a high-frequency support mode or not, and data indicating whether the mode is a high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte data set identification data to indicate that the command is a type command, and the next 4 bits of data are used to determine whether the command is correct or not. Lottery result data corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set, and the remaining 8 bits of data are used to recognize the state of whether or not it is in high probability mode and whether or not it is in high frequency support mode. is set. Therefore, when the sound/light side MPU 82 receives a type command, it recognizes that it is a type command from the above-mentioned identification data, and recognizes the result of the validity judgment process and the result of the distribution judgment process from the above-mentioned lottery result data. , recognizes whether or not the mode is high probability mode and whether or not the mode is high frequency support mode from the state recognition data.

Both the variation command and the type command include data corresponding to the results of the validity determination process and the distribution determination process. Therefore, the sound/light side MPU 82 compares the above lottery result data included in the variation command with the above lottery result data included in the type command, thereby eliminating noise and the like regarding reception of the variation command and the type command. It becomes possible to specify whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred. Then, if both lottery result data match, control for production corresponding to the contents of the variation command and type command is executed, and if both lottery result data do not match, can be notified. Incidentally, in the latter case, the sound/light side MPU 82 may be configured to execute a game repeat operation corresponding to the communication abnormality in the relevant game round. Regardless of the result of the process, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a complete miss may be reliably stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, the game repeat operation may be configured to be performed over a variable duration period corresponding to the time data included in the variable command, and may be continued until the next variable command and type command are received. Good too. Note that the variation command may include a configuration in which data of one of the results of the validity determination process and the results of the distribution determination process is not included, or a configuration in which both data are not included.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), after executing the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process in step S512, the information on the fluctuation continuation period of the gaming session acquired in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process is , is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main side RAM 64 (step S513). The numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is updated in the timer update process (step S210) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10).

Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols is started on the display section on the side to be executed in the current game round among the first special symbol display section 37a and the second special symbol display section 37b (step S514). Thereafter, the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S515). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure variation start process to the value corresponding to the process during special figure variation.

<Processing during special figure fluctuation>
Next, the special figure fluctuation processing in step S407 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15.

First, by checking whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter in the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has elapsed (step S701). If the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has not elapsed (step S701: NO), display update processing is executed (step S702). In the display update process, a process for regularly changing the display mode of the symbols on the side to be executed in the current game round of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b is executed. This regular change continues until it is time to start the final stop display. Further, this regular change is performed in a fixed manner regardless of whether there is a winning result or not and whether or not a reach display occurs.

When the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has elapsed (step S701: YES), display processing of the stop result is executed (step S703). In the display processing, the display mode of the symbols on the side to be executed in the current game round of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b is set to a display mode corresponding to the result of the current game round. Specifically, at the start of the current game round, the information on the stop result stored in the main side RAM 64 in step S506, step S509, or step S511 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 13) is read out, and the read out stop result information is read out. The symbol corresponding to the result information is continuously displayed on the side to be executed in the current game round of the first special symbol display section 37a and the second special symbol display section 37b. This pattern display state continues until the next variable display of the pattern starts on the corresponding special figure display sections 37a, 37b.

Thereafter, a final stop period selection process is executed (step S704). As already explained, the execution period of a game round is the period of continuous variation, which is the period from the start of the variable display of symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 until the start of static display of each symbol. , and a final stop period, which is a period from the start of static display of each symbol until the static display ends. In step S704, the latter period, the final stop period, is selected. This pachinko machine 10 has two types of periods that are subject to the final stop period: 0.5 seconds (first final stop period) and 3 seconds (second final stop period), and the final stop period can be selected. In the process, one of these two types of periods is selected to be the final stop period of the current game round.

Thereafter, information on the final stop period of the game round selected in step S704 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S705). As a result, measurement of the final stop period in the current game round is started.

Thereafter, a final stop command including information on the final stop period of the currently selected game round is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S706). By receiving the final stop command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the final stop period of the current game round and starts measuring the final stop period, and also sends a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92 to display the symbols. The display device 41 starts statically displaying each symbol that is the stop result of the current game round. The static display continues throughout the final stop period of the current game round.

Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S707). Thereby, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the process during special figure fluctuation to the value corresponding to the process during special figure confirmation.

<Special drawing confirmation process>
Next, the special figure confirmation process of step S408 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 12) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16.

First, by checking whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter in the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S801). When a negative determination is made in step S801, the present special symbol determination process is directly ended.

If the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S801: YES), the condition is that the validity determination result that triggered the current game round is a jackpot result or a small win result (step S802: YES), execute processing for transitioning to opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, first, an opening period selection process is executed (step S803). The opening period is a period secured before the opening of the first special electric winning device 32 starts in the opening/closing execution mode. An opening effect indicating that the mode is started is executed. The details will be described later, but this pachinko machine 10 has two types of opening periods set: 4 seconds (first opening period) and 10 seconds (second opening period), and opening period selection processing is performed. Then, select one of these two types of periods to be the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode.

Thereafter, information on the opening period selected in step S803 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S804). As a result, measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

Thereafter, an opening command including information on the currently selected opening period is transmitted to the audio-optical MPU 82 (step S805). By receiving the opening command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the opening period, and displays an opening effect corresponding to the current opening period on the light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed by the section 54. Further, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is caused to perform an opening performance corresponding to the current opening period.

Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S806). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the value corresponding to the special electric line starting process.

On the other hand, if the judgment result that triggered the current game round is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result (step S802: NO), the high probability flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is "0". By determining whether or not the high-frequency support flag is "1", it is possible to determine whether the low-probability mode is activated after the opening/closing execution mode, which was triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result of the game round that ended this time, is determined. Then, it is determined whether the game was played in a high-frequency support mode (step S807). The high probability flag is a flag used by the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery is the high probability mode, and the situation where the high probability flag is set to "1" is the high probability mode. A situation in which the high probability flag is "0" is the low probability mode. Furthermore, the high-frequency support flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to specify whether or not the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. This is a support mode, and a situation where the high frequency support flag is "0" is a low frequency support mode.

If it is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S807: YES), the value of the number of games counter provided in the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S808). The number of games counter is a counter used by the main MPU 62 to specify the number of times the remaining game times are executed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. When the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low probability jackpot result ends, the high probability flag of the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" and the high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1". is set, and furthermore, "80", which is the end standard number of games, is set in the game number counter of the main side RAM 64.

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after subtracting 1 is "0", it is determined whether the game count of the end standard number of times has been executed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (step S809). When the value of the number of games counter is "0" (step S809: YES), the high frequency support flag in the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S810). This results in a situation where the mode is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

Thereafter, the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S811). In other words, even if the value of the total round number counter 64c is changed from high probability mode to low probability mode, if the high frequency support mode is continued, the value of the total round number counter 64c is not cleared to "0", but when the value is changed from high frequency support mode to low frequency support mode. It is cleared to "0" when the transition occurs.

If a negative determination is made in step S807, if a negative determination is made in step S809, or if the process of step S811 is executed, the special figure special electric line counter is cleared to "0" (step S812). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

<Special call start process>
Next, the special train start process in step S409 in the special train special train control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 17.

First, by checking whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter in the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether the opening time in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S901). If a negative determination is made in step S901, the present special call start process is immediately terminated.

If the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S901: YES), the jackpot result is determined on the condition that the trigger for executing the current opening/closing execution mode is one of the jackpot results (step S902: YES). Execute the time setting process.

In the setting process for the jackpot result, the value of the number of round games corresponding to the current jackpot result is set in the round counter provided in the main side RAM 64 (step S903). Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 2R high-probability jackpot result, the round counter is set to "2", and if the current jackpot result is a 5R high-probability jackpot result, the round counter is set to ``2''. "5" is set, and if the current jackpot result is a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, "10" is set in the round counter. The round counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify the number of remaining round games in the opening/closing execution mode.

After that, on the condition that the current jackpot result is not a 2R high-probability jackpot result, that is, the current jackpot result is one of the 5R high-probability jackpot result, 10R low-probability jackpot result, and 10R high-probability jackpot result (step S904: NO), a setting process for the round history counter provided in the main side RAM 64 is executed (step S905). In other words, the setting process is executed when the opening/closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode, is executed, and is not executed when the opening/closing execution mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, is executed. Specifically, if the current jackpot result is a 5R high-probability jackpot result, the round history counter in the main side RAM 64 is set to "5", and the current jackpot result is a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result. If it is the result, "10" is set in the round history counter of the main side RAM 64. Although the details will be described later, the value set in the round history counter is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 when the current opening/closing execution mode ends. In this way, by adding the value of the number of rounds executed in the current opening/closing execution mode to the total round number counter 64c at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the total round number counter 64c is added to the number of rounds that have already been executed. It becomes possible to set the total number of times the game is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, or if the process in step S905 is executed, "10" is set in the winning counter provided in the main side RAM 64 (step S906). The prize winning counter is a counter for the main side MPU 62 to specify whether or not a winning of the upper limit number of game balls has occurred in one round game or one opening/closing number regulation mode.

Thereafter, a readout process of the open duration period corresponding to the jackpot result is executed (step S907). Specifically, when the jackpot result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is a 2R high certainty jackpot result, information on the opening duration corresponding to the short-term mode is read from the main side ROM 63. The opening duration is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 seconds). On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggered this opening/closing execution mode is any of the 5R high-probability jackpot results, 10R low-probability jackpot results, and 10R high-probability jackpot results, the main side ROM 63 supports the long-term mode. The information about the open duration (29 seconds) is read out.

On the other hand, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a small winning result (step S902: NO), a setting process for the small winning result is executed. In the setting process for small winning results, the opening/closing counter provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "2" (step S908), and the winning counter of the main side RAM 64 is set to "10" (step S909). The opening/closing counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to specify the number of times the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed in the opening/closing execution mode of the opening/closing number regulation mode.

Thereafter, a process of reading out the open duration period corresponding to the small winning result is executed (step S910). The opening duration period is stored in advance in the main side ROM 63, and specifically, it is 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 seconds). In addition, the opening duration corresponding to the small winning result may be longer than the opening duration of the short-term mode and shorter than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball, or may be the same as or equal to the shortest firing cycle of the game ball. It may be substantially the same, or it may be a period longer than the shortest firing cycle of the game ball (ie, the first cycle) and shorter than the longest firing cycle of the game ball (ie, the fourth cycle).

When the processing of step S907 or step S910 is executed, the read out information on the open duration period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S911). As a result, measurement of the open duration period is started. The open duration period is constant regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. Further, the value of the upper limit number set in the winning counter of the main side RAM 64 is also constant regardless of the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c from affecting the number of game balls that are paid out upon winning to the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode.

Thereafter, an opening setting process for setting the special electric prize winning device 32 in an open state is executed (step S912). Furthermore, a release command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S913). The release command is a command for making the sound/light side MPU 82 recognize that it is the timing when the special electric prize winning device 32 is released. By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 executes control for switching the effects of the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41 during the opening/closing execution mode accordingly.

Thereafter, the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S914). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric line start process to the value corresponding to the special electric line opening process.

<Processing while special electric line is open>
Next, the special train opening process in step S410 in the special figure special train control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 18.

First, an open monitoring process is executed (step S1001). In the open monitoring process, when one game ball wins in the special electric winning device 32, the value of the winning counter in the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the winning counter after 1 subtraction is "0" It is determined that the closing condition is satisfied. Further, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied also when the value of the special figure special electric timer counter is "0", that is, when the opening continuation period has elapsed.

As a result of the opening monitoring process, if it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied (step S1002: YES), a closing setting process is executed to bring the special electric winning device 32 into a closed state (step S1003). Further, a process for understanding the termination conditions is executed (step S1004). Specifically, if this time is the opening/closing execution mode triggered by any jackpot result, the value of the round counter in the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the round counter after subtracting 1 is "0" It is determined that the termination conditions for the current opening/closing execution mode have been met. In addition, if this time is the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, the value of the opening/closing counter in the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the opening/closing counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the opening/closing execution mode of this time is It is determined that the execution mode termination condition has been met. Furthermore, if this is the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning result, it is determined that the termination condition of the current opening/closing execution mode is satisfied even if the value of the winning counter in the main side RAM 64 is "0".

If the condition for ending the opening/closing execution mode is not satisfied (step S1005: NO), an interval period selection process is executed (step S1006). The interval period is a period in which the special electric winning device 32 is maintained in a closed state between one opening of the special electric winning device 32 and the next opening, and during the interval period, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section are closed. 54 and the symbol display device 41, effects corresponding to the interval period are executed. The details will be described later, but this pachinko machine 10 has two types of periods set as the interval period: 2 seconds (first interval period) and 6 seconds (second interval period), and the interval period selection process is performed. Now, from these two types of periods, select the one that will be the current interval period. Note that although the interval period occurs multiple times during the first open/close execution mode, the interval period does not change during the first open/close execution mode, and all interval periods are constant in the first open/close execution mode. becomes.

Thereafter, information on the interval period selected in step S1006 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S1007). As a result, measurement for the current interval period is started.

Thereafter, a closing command including information on the currently selected interval period is transmitted to the audio-light side MPU 82 (step S1008). Upon receiving the closing command, the sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the current interval period and starts measuring the interval period, and at the same time executes the display corresponding to the current interval period on the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. let Further, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is caused to perform an effect corresponding to the current interval period.

Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electric counter is incremented by 1 (step S1009). As a result, the value of the special train special train counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special train opening process to the value corresponding to the special train closing process.

If the end condition of the opening/closing execution mode is satisfied (step S1005: YES), an ending period selection process is executed (step S1010). The ending period is a period secured from the end of the opening state of the last special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode until the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Then, an ending effect indicating that the opening/closing execution mode ends is executed on the symbol display device 41. The details will be described later, but this pachinko machine 10 has two types of periods that are subject to the ending period: 6 seconds (first ending period) and 12 seconds (second ending period), and the ending period selection process Now, select one of these two types of periods to be the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode.

Thereafter, information on the ending period selected in step S1010 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S1011). As a result, measurement of the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

Thereafter, an ending command including information on the ending period selected this time is transmitted to the audio-light side MPU 82 (step S1012). By receiving the ending command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the ending period, and displays an ending effect corresponding to the current ending period using the light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed by the section 54. Further, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is caused to perform an ending effect corresponding to the current ending period.

After that, 2 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S1013). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric line opening process to the value corresponding to the special electric line ending process.

<Processing during special electric train closure>
Next, the special train closed processing in step S411 in the special train special train control process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 19.

First, by checking whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter in the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether the current interval period has elapsed (step S1101). If a negative determination is made in step S1101, the present special train closed processing is immediately terminated.

If the current interval period has elapsed (step S1101: YES), and on the condition that the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by any of the big win results (step S1102: YES), the winning counter in the main RAM 64 is set to "10" (step S1103), and the open duration corresponding to the big win result is read (step S1104). The contents of the open duration corresponding to the big win result are the same as in step S907 in the special power start process (FIG. 17). Also, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a small win result (step S1102: NO), the open duration corresponding to the small win result is read (step S1105). The contents of the open duration corresponding to the small win result are the same as in step S910 in the special power start process (FIG. 17).

When the process of step S1104 or step S1105 is executed, the read out information on the open duration period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S1106). As a result, measurement of the open duration period is started. Here, the open duration period is constant regardless of the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. Further, the value of the upper limit number set in the winning counter of the main side RAM 64 is also constant regardless of the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c from affecting the number of game balls that are paid out upon winning to the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode.

Thereafter, an opening setting process for setting the special electric prize winning device 32 in an open state is executed (step S1107). Further, a release command is transmitted to the audio-light side MPU 82 (step S1108). The release command is a command for making the sound/light side MPU 82 recognize that it is the timing when the special electric prize winning device 32 is released. By receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 executes control for switching the effects of the display light emitting section 53, the speaker section 54, and the symbol display device 41 during the opening/closing execution mode accordingly.

Thereafter, the special figure special electric counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1109). As a result, the value of the special train special train counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special train closed process to the value corresponding to the special train open process.

<Special call termination process>
Next, the special train termination process of step S412 in the special figure special train control process (FIG. 12) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20.

First, by checking whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter in the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S1201). If a negative determination is made in step S1201, this special call termination process is directly terminated.

If the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S1201: YES), a game state transition process is executed (step S1202). In the game state transition process, if the winning result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time is a 10R low probability jackpot result, the high probability flag in the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" and the high frequency support flag is set to "0". 1", and further sets the game number counter to "80", which is a value corresponding to the reference number of ends. As a result, the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery becomes a low probability mode, and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode with an upper limit of 80 games. In addition, if the winning result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode this time is a 5R high-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, the high probability flag in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" and high-frequency support is set. Set the flag to "1". As a result, the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery becomes a high probability mode, and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode. In addition, if the winning result that triggered the execution of the current opening/closing execution mode is a 2R high probability jackpot result, the high probability flag in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1", and the high frequency support flag is set for the opening/closing execution mode this time. This is the state before the mode starts. As a result, if the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode was started is the low-frequency support mode, the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery is the high probability mode, the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode, and the opening/closing execution mode is changed to the low-frequency support mode. If the support mode before starting is the high-frequency support mode, the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery is the high-probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. In addition, if the winning result that triggered the execution of the current opening/closing execution mode is a small winning result, both the high probability flag and the high frequency support flag in the main side RAM 64 will be set before the opening/closing execution mode is started. state.

Thereafter, on the condition that the high frequency support flag of the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S1203: YES), the value of the round history counter of the main side RAM 64 is read (step S1204), and the read value is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 (step S1205). As already explained, the round history counter of the main side RAM 64 stores the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, which is a high-frequency winning mode triggered by a jackpot result. The value is set. Therefore, the total round number counter 64c stores the total number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode.

When a 2R high-probability jackpot result is obtained, an opening/closing execution mode which is a low frequency winning mode is executed, but the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode is not added to the total number of rounds counter 64c. Further, when the result is a small win, an opening/closing execution mode similar to the low frequency winning mode is executed, but the addition of the total number of rounds counter 64c is not executed in the opening/closing execution mode as well. As a result, the total number of rounds counter 64c measures the number of times a round game is executed, in which the game ball is substantially paid out, in other words, the player is substantially given a profit.

Since the addition process to the total number of rounds counter 64c (step S1205) is executed on the condition that the high frequency support flag is set to "1", an opening/closing execution mode that becomes a low frequency support mode after completion occurs. Even if it is, addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c is not executed. Furthermore, as already explained, when the support mode is changed from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode in step S810 of the special drawing confirmation process (FIG. 16), the value of the total round number counter 64c is cleared to "0". (Step S811), and the transition from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode is executed only in step S810 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 16). Therefore, the total number of rounds counter 64c includes the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, which triggers the transition from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, and the number of round games executed in the low-probability mode after that. The total number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode that was executed until the game round in the low-frequency support mode was started is stored.

When a negative determination is made in step S1203, or when the process in step S1205 is executed, the special figure special electric line counter is cleared to "0" (step S1206). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric line end process to the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

<About the processing configuration in the sound-light side MPU 82>
Next, each process for controlling the performance and notification execution by the sound and light side MPU 82 will be explained.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec) by the audio/light side MPU 82.

First, main side command storage processing is executed (step S1301). The main side command storage process is a process for storing the command in the audio/light side RAM 84 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 84 is provided with a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and stored. They are sequentially read out in the order in which they were written.

Thereafter, main-side command corresponding processing is executed to perform processing corresponding to the command received from the main-side MPU 62 (step S1302). FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the main side command corresponding processing.

If the variation command and type command have been received from the main MPU 62 (step S1401: YES), storage processing of game results is executed (step S1402). Specifically, from the information included in the variation command, information about the validity judgment result and the distribution judgment result determined by the main side MPU 62 at the start of the current game round is specified, A process of writing the identified information into the audio-optical side RAM 84 is executed. In addition, during the storage process, the lottery result data included in the variation command and the lottery result data included in the type command are checked to ensure that the communication of these variation commands and type commands is successful. It may be determined whether or not the communication is abnormal, and if the communication is abnormal, corresponding notification processing and data storage processing may be performed.

Thereafter, a production pattern determination process is executed (step S1403). In the performance pattern determination processing, the details of which will be described later, are executed to determine whether or not to perform a preview performance, and at the same time, a stop display is performed when the fluctuation duration of the current game round on the symbol display device 41 ends. A stop symbol determination process is executed to determine the stop symbol that will be in place. Then, select a performance pattern corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the game round set in the fluctuation command, the contents of the validity judgment result and distribution judgment result for the current game round, and the presence or absence of a preview performance, and select the performance pattern. A data table for game performance corresponding to the above is read from the sound-light side ROM 83 to the sound-light side RAM 84. Furthermore, if an extension command is sent from the main MPU 62 in accordance with the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main RAM 64, the contents of the data table for game rendition are corrected according to the content of the extension command. . The data table for the game run performance that is finally stored in the sound and light side RAM 84 in step S1403 is such that the execution period of the performance is the same as the variation continuation period of the game run currently determined by the main side MPU 62. There is. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and the sound output control of the speaker section 54 according to the data table, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 execute the effect of the current game round corresponding to the above effect pattern. be done.

Thereafter, a game reuse command is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 (step S1404). The game replay command includes a pattern command corresponding to the data table for the game replay read out to the sound-light side RAM 84 in the rendition pattern determination process (step S1403) and a stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process. A stop result command corresponding to the information is sent to the display MPU 92. By receiving these commands, the display-side MPU 92 reads display data tables corresponding to these commands from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing display control according to the display data table, the symbol display device 41 displays a moving image of the current game round corresponding to the stop symbols determined in the performance pattern and stop symbol determination process. Ru.

If a final stop command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step S1405: YES), final stop processing is executed (step S1406). In the final stop processing, the final stop period of the current game round is grasped from the contents of the final stop command, and measurement of the final stop period is started. At the same time, a data table corresponding to the final stop period is read from the sound-light side ROM 83. Read out to the optical side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of final stop period are set, 0.5 seconds and 3 seconds, so the data table corresponding to the final stop period is the data table corresponding to 0.5 seconds and the data table corresponding to 3 seconds. There are tables. By controlling the light emission of the display light emitting section 53 and controlling the sound output of the speaker section 54 in accordance with the data table, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 perform an effect corresponding to the current final stop period. Further, the audio/light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current final stop period to the display side MPU 92. By receiving the command, the display side MPU 92 causes the symbol display device 41 to start statically displaying each symbol that is the stop result of the current game round. The static display continues throughout the final stop period of the current game round.

If an opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (step S1407: YES), opening processing is executed (step S1408). In the opening process, the current opening period is determined from the contents of the opening command, and measurement of the opening period is started, and a data table corresponding to the opening period is read from the audio-optical side ROM 83 to the audio-optical side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of opening periods are set, 4 seconds and 10 seconds, so a data table corresponding to 4 seconds and a data table corresponding to 10 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the opening period. There is. By controlling the light emission of the display light emitting section 53 and controlling the sound output of the speaker section 54 according to the data table, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 perform an opening performance corresponding to the current opening period. Further, the audio and optical side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current opening period to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing display control according to the display data table, a moving image display corresponding to the current opening period is executed on the symbol display device 41. Note that the opening performance may be set not only in correspondence with the type of opening period, but also in correspondence with the type of winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the opening effects of the 2R high-probability jackpot result and the small win result be the same.

If a release command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step S1409: YES), release processing is executed (step S1410). In the opening process, the current opening duration is determined from the content of the opening command, and a data table corresponding to the opening duration is read from the audio-optical side ROM 83 to the audio-optical RAM 84. As already explained, two types of open duration period are set: 0.5 seconds and 29 seconds, so the data table corresponding to the open duration period is a data table corresponding to 0.5 seconds and a data table corresponding to 29 seconds. There are tables. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting section 53 and the sound output control of the speaker section 54 according to the data table, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 execute an opening effect corresponding to the current open duration period. Ru. Further, the audio and optical side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current open duration period to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing display control according to the display data table, a moving image display corresponding to the current opening duration period is executed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, the performance during opening is not only set according to the type of opening duration period, but also corresponds to the type of winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode and the number of round games played in the opening/closing execution mode. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is set as follows. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the 2R high-probability jackpot result and the small win result be rendered in common during the opening.

If a closing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step S1411: YES), closing processing is executed (step S1412). In the closing process, the current interval period is determined from the contents of the closing command, and a data table corresponding to the interval period is read from the sound-light side ROM 83 to the sound-light side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of interval periods are set, 2 seconds and 6 seconds, so a data table corresponding to 2 seconds and a data table corresponding to 6 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the interval period. There is. By executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the data table, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 execute the closed effect corresponding to the current interval period. . Further, the audio/light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current interval period to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing display control according to the display data table, a moving image display corresponding to the current interval period is executed on the symbol display device 41. Note that the closed performance may be set not only in correspondence with the type of interval period, but also in correspondence with the type of winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the 2R high-probability jackpot result and small win result have the same effect during closing.

If an ending command has been received from the main MPU 62 (step S1413: YES), ending processing is executed (step S1414). In the ending process, the current ending period is grasped from the contents of the ending command, and measurement of the ending period is started, and a data table corresponding to the ending period is read from the sound-light side ROM 83 to the sound-light side RAM 84. As already explained, two types of ending periods are set, 6 seconds and 12 seconds, so a data table corresponding to 6 seconds and a data table corresponding to 12 seconds are provided as data tables corresponding to the ending period. There is. By controlling the light emission of the display light emitting section 53 and controlling the sound output of the speaker section 54 in accordance with the data table, the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 perform an ending effect corresponding to the current ending period. Further, the audio/light side MPU 82 transmits a command corresponding to the current ending period to the display side MPU 92. Upon receiving the command, the display-side MPU 92 reads the display data table corresponding to the command from the display-side ROM 93 to the display-side RAM 94. Then, by executing display control according to the display data table, a moving image display corresponding to the current ending period is executed on the symbol display device 41. Note that the ending performance may be set not only in correspondence with the type of ending period, but also in correspondence with the type of winning result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode. However, even in this case, it is preferable that the ending effect for the 2R high-probability jackpot result and the small win result be the same.

In the main-side command corresponding processing, other processing is executed in addition to the various processing described above (step S1415). Other processes include notification processing and demonstration performance processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 21), after executing the main command corresponding process in step S1302, the light emission control process is executed (step S1303), and the sound output control process is executed (step S1304). In the light emission control process, a process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting section 53 is executed according to the data table stored in the sound and light side RAM 84. In the sound output control process, a process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 54 is executed according to a data table stored in the sound/light side RAM 84.

<Processing configuration for ensuring that appropriate profits are given to players>
Next, a processing configuration for ensuring that a moderate profit is given to the player will be explained. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the cycle setting process executed in step S306 of the firing control process (FIG. 11) in the main MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main side RAM 64 is less than a first reference value (step S1501). As already explained, the total number of rounds counter 64c contains the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode, which triggers the transition from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, and the number of round games executed in the low-probability mode after that. The total number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode that was executed before the start of the game round in the low-frequency support mode is stored. The first reference value is a value larger than the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high-probability jackpot result, and is a value larger than the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R high-probability jackpot result (or 10R low-probability jackpot result). This is the value of the number of round games executed in the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, it is set to "10". As a result, the value of the total round number counter 64c will not reach the first reference value even if the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-probability jackpot result occurs only once in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R high-probability jackpot result (or 10R low-probability jackpot result) occurs once in the low-frequency support mode, the value of the total round number counter 64c reaches the first reference value.

Note that the first reference value is not limited to "10", and is a value larger than the value of the number of executions of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of executions of the round game is relatively small. It may be configured such that the value is less than or equal to the number of executions of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of executions of the round game is relatively large. Further, the first reference value may be a value larger than the value of the number of executions of the round game in the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the number of executions of the round game is relatively large. The value may be less than or equal to the number of times the round game is executed in the opening/closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode.

If the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the first reference value (step S1501: YES), the first cycle that allows firing of 100 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64. Corresponding information is set (step S1502). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the launch cycle area 64b, in the launch control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the launch control unit 78c, the first cycle is set in the launch cycle area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period passes, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game balls to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined whether the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S1503). The second reference value is the value of the total number of round games to be executed when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-probability jackpot result (or 10R low-probability jackpot result) occurs twice as the first plurality of times. The total number of round games to be executed when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R high-probability jackpot result (or 10R low-probability jackpot result) occurs three times, which is the second plurality. The value is . Specifically, it is set to "30". As a result, an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs in the low-frequency support mode, and then a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result in the subsequent high-frequency support mode. Even if the triggering opening/closing execution mode occurs, the value of the total round number counter 64c will never reach the second reference value. Further, in the subsequent high-frequency support mode, when an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs further, the value of the total round number counter 64c reaches the second reference value. Note that the second reference value is not limited to "30", and may be less than 30 as long as it is a value larger than the first reference value and smaller than the third reference value. The value may be larger than 30''.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S1503: YES). Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables the launch of 90 game balls per minute is set in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S1504). The second period is the second shortest firing period, approximately 0.67 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the launch cycle area 64b, in the launch control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the launch control unit 78c, the second cycle is set. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period passes, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game balls to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the amount of rotation is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined whether the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main side RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S1505). The third reference value is the value of the total number of round games to be executed when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R high-probability jackpot result (or 10R low-probability jackpot result) occurs five times, which is the third plurality. The total number of round games to be executed when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R high-probability jackpot result (or 10R low-probability jackpot result) occurs six times, which is the fourth plurality. The value is . Specifically, it is set to "60". As a result, an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs in the low-frequency support mode, and then a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result in the subsequent high-frequency support mode. Even if the triggering opening/closing execution mode occurs four times, the value of the total round number counter 64c will never reach the third reference value. Further, in the subsequent high-frequency support mode, when an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs further, the value of the total round number counter 64c reaches the third reference value. Note that the third reference value is not limited to "60", and may be less than 60 or may be a value greater than "60" as long as it is larger than the second reference value. .

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S1505: YES). Information corresponding to the third cycle that enables the launch of 80 game balls per minute is set in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S1506). The third period is the second longest firing period, 0.75 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the third period in the firing period area 64b, in the firing control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the firing control section 78c, the third period is set in the firing period area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third period passes, and the game ball is stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game ball to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the amount of rotation is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the third period passes.

If the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S1505: NO), the fourth cycle that enables the launch of 70 game balls per minute is entered in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64. Corresponding information is set (step S1507). The fourth period is the longest firing period, approximately 0.86 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the fourth period in the firing period area 64b, in the firing control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the firing control section 78c, the fourth period is set in the firing period area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth period passes, and the game ball is stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game ball to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the fourth cycle elapses.

As described above, the larger the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes, the longer the firing cycle of the game ball becomes. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball firing cycle will be longer. It will become. As the firing cycle of game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time becomes lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

The firing period of the game ball increases in stages as the value of the total round number counter 64c increases. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more The firing cycle of game balls becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to impose regulations on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time in accordance with the amount of profit given to the player.

If the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played five times occurs only once, the firing cycle of the game ball is maintained at 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning result is executed, addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the game area PA even when there is no substantial profit in providing game balls. .

Addition to the total round number counter 64c is performed when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and does not occur during the opening/closing execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the firing cycle of game balls from suddenly slowing down in the middle of the opening/closing execution mode.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the period adjustment process executed in step S616 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the main MPU 62.

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variable continuation period of the current game round (step S1601: YES), the process for extending the variable continuation period of the game round shown after step S1602 is not executed. As already explained, when a game round that results in a jackpot occurs in a situation where the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, step S604 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) The longest period is selected as the fluctuation continuation period for the current game round. In this case, if the longest period has already been selected, by not executing the process for extending the fluctuating duration of gaming times shown after step S1602, the long period of fluctuating duration of gaming times can be It is possible to prevent the changes from being executed cumulatively for the fluctuation duration of one game.

In a situation where the period of variation in game times is not the longest period (step S1601: NO), and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. (Step S1602: YES), the first extension process of the fluctuation continuation period is executed (Step S1603). Specifically, 1 second is added as the first extension period to the fluctuation duration acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). Furthermore, a first extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the first extension period is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S1604). When the sound-light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it understands that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the first extension period, and also updates the data table for the game round production in accordance with the extension. Modify the contents of. This will be explained in detail later. Note that the first reference value is "10" as already explained, and the second reference value is "30" as already explained.

In a situation where the period of variation in game times is not the longest period (step S1601: NO), and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value. (Step S1605: YES), a second extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (Step S1606). Specifically, 2 seconds is added as the second extension period to the fluctuation duration acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). Further, a second extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the second extension period is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S1607). When the sound-light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it understands that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the second extension period, and also updates the data table for the game round production in accordance with the extension. Modify the contents of. This will be explained in detail later. Note that the third reference value is "60" as already explained.

In a situation where the variation duration of game times is not the longest period (step S1601: NO) and the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S1608: YES), the variation A third extension process of the duration is executed (step S1609). Specifically, 3 seconds is added as the third extension period to the fluctuation duration acquired in step S614 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14). Further, a third extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the third extension period is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S1610). When the sound-light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it understands that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the third extension period, and also updates the data table for the game round production in accordance with the extension. Modify the contents of. This will be explained in detail later.

As described above, the larger the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main side RAM 64 becomes, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game rounds executed in the high frequency support mode becomes. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode will not be activated. However, the period during which the number of games fluctuates will become longer. Then, as the duration of fluctuation of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time becomes lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

The extension of the variation continuation period of the game rounds increases in stages as the value of the total round number counter 64c increases. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more The duration of fluctuation in game times becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to impose regulations on the number of times a game occurs per unit time in accordance with the amount of profit given to the player.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played five times occurs only once, the fluctuating period of the game times will not be extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of times a game occurs per unit time.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning result is executed, the total number of rounds counter 64c is not added. This makes it possible to prevent regulations regarding the number of gaming times per unit time from occurring even when there is no substantial profit in giving game balls.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the production pattern determination process executed in step S1403 of the main side command corresponding process (FIG. 22) in the sound and light side MPU 82.

First, information on the duration of fluctuation of the game is grasped from the fluctuation command received this time (step S1701). Thereafter, a lottery process for preview performance is executed (step S1702). In the lottery process for preview performance, it is determined by lottery whether or not the preview performance will be generated in the current game round. In the preview performance, the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped in the symbol display device 41, a combination of reach symbols with the same symbol is formed, and the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are stopped. This is done in a situation where the display of fluctuations continues. In the preview performance, a character image different from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. In the lottery process of the preview performance, the lottery is executed so that the preview performance is more likely to occur in a game round corresponding to a jackpot result than in a game round corresponding to a losing result.

After that, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S1703). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a 5R high probability jackpot result, a 10R low probability jackpot result, or a 10R high probability jackpot result, the same symbol is placed on one active line L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result that satisfies the combination of is determined as the information of the current stop result. The active lines L1 to L5 on which the same symbol combinations are stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

The probability that the same combination of odd symbols will be stopped and displayed is higher in the 5R high-probability jackpot result and the 10R high-probability jackpot result than in the 10R low-probability jackpot result. Further, the probability that the combination of "7" symbols will be stopped and displayed is higher in the 10R high-probability jackpot result than in the 5R high-probability jackpot result and the 10R low-probability jackpot result. In addition, if the game result of the current game round is a 2R high certainty jackpot result or small hit result, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on all active lines L1 to L5, and one active line L1 ~The information corresponding to the stop result in which a specific combination of symbols ("3, 4, 1") is established on L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a winning result, the presence or absence of a reach display is determined from the contents of the variation command. When a reach display occurs, the combination of the same symbols on all active lines L1 to L5 and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols are not established, and the result is a stop result on one or two active lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if the reach display does not occur, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol on all active lines L1 to L5 and the combination of the above-mentioned specific symbols are not established, and the reach display occurs on all active lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of symbols is not established is determined as information on the current stop result.

After that, information on the fluctuation duration of the game round set in the fluctuation command received this time, the contents of the validity judgment result and the distribution judgment result for the current game round, and the performance pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of the preview performance. is selected, and the data table for the game round performance corresponding to the performance pattern is read out from the sound and light side ROM 83 to the sound and light side RAM 84 (step S1704). Although the information on the stop symbols determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S1703) is not reflected in the production pattern, the information on the stop symbols is transmitted to the display side MPU 92 as already explained. Therefore, the video display of the current game round on the symbol display device 41 has content that corresponds to the above performance pattern, and has content that corresponds to the information on the stop symbols determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S1703).

FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the data table for the game round effects that are selected when the small winning result is not obtained.

As shown in FIG. 26, if the variation duration of the game round is 2 seconds or 3 seconds, it will not be a jackpot result, and furthermore, the occurrence of the preview performance will not result in a winning in the lottery process of the preview performance. Therefore, if the fluctuation duration of the game times specified in the fluctuation command is 2 seconds, the first data table is selected as the data table for the game time effect, and if the fluctuation duration of the game times is 3 seconds. In some cases, the second data table is selected as the data table for game performance.

When the variation duration of a game round is 5 seconds or more, a plurality of data tables exist corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot result and the presence or absence of a preview performance. Therefore, if the variation duration of the game play specified in the variation command is 5 or more, the data table corresponding to the presence or absence of a jackpot result and the presence or absence of a preview effect is selected from among the corresponding plural data tables. Ru.

The 10-minute fluctuation duration is the longest fluctuation duration of game times in this pachinko machine 10. As already explained, in a situation where the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, if a game round that results in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs, the fluctuation continues. In step S604 in the period acquisition process (FIG. 14), the longest period is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game round. And the maximum period is not selected in any other circumstances. Therefore, the longest variation duration of 10 minutes is selected only in case of a jackpot result. On the other hand, even if the period is the longest, there are cases where the preview effect is executed and cases where it is not executed. Therefore, when the variation duration is 10 minutes and no preview effect occurs, the n+4th data table is selected, and when the variation duration is 10 minutes and a preview effect occurs, the n+5th data table is selected. be done.

As mentioned above, in a situation where the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the longest period is selected when a game round that results in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs. Therefore, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the 10R low probability jackpot result and the 10R The continuation period of fluctuations in game rounds that result in one of the highly certain jackpot results becomes extremely long. Then, as the duration of fluctuation in game times becomes longer, it takes a longer time until the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

When the maximum variation duration period of 10 minutes is selected, in the video display of the game round on the symbol display device 41, the symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 start to be fluctuated, and then the upper symbol row Z1 The variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped, and the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is also stopped. In this case, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on one or two active lines L1 to L5 in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, so that the combination of ready-to-reach symbols is stopped and displayed. In this situation, the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is continued to perform the reach display. When a preview performance occurs, a character corresponding to the preview performance is displayed when the ready-to-reach display is started. After that, an image indicating that the combination of the ready-to-reach symbols and the fluctuating display of symbols is being performed in the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the symbol display device 41, and instead, the image is displayed on the display surface of the symbol display device 41. A long-term dedicated movie image, which is a live-action image that follows a series of stories, is displayed in substantially the entire area 41a.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the movie image dedicated for the longest period displayed on the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 27(a), the upper right corner of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 shows that the combination of ready-to-reach symbols and the variation of symbols are displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Image G1 is displayed. The movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed in a large display range including the center of the display surface 41a. The movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is not displayed when an out-of-reach display occurs or when a reach-to-reach display does not occur. Furthermore, it is not displayed in game rounds that result in a 5R high-probability jackpot result, a 2R high-probability jackpot result, or a small win result. Therefore, when the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, the occurrence of a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result is confirmed. In other words, when the movie image G2 dedicated for the longest period is displayed, it is confirmed that the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, will occur. This makes it possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction with the display of the movie image G2 exclusive for the longest period.

When the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period is displayed, a remaining time image G3 for notifying the remaining time of the movie image G2 exclusively for the longest period is displayed in the upper left corner of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. Is displayed. In this case, since the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period ends when the variable continuation period of the game session has elapsed, it can be said that the remaining time image G3 reports the remaining time of the variable continuation period of the game session. By displaying the remaining time image G3 in this way, when the variation duration of a game session becomes the longest period, the player can grasp the remaining time of the variation duration of the game session. This makes it possible to alleviate the player's anxiety about not being able to finish the game for a long time.

The timing at which display of the remaining time image G3 starts will be explained with reference to the time chart in FIG. 27(b). FIG. 27(b1) shows the execution period of the game round, and FIG. 27(b2) shows the period in which the pre-reach display in which the fluctuating display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is not stopped. , FIG. 27(b3) shows the period during which the reach display is executed, FIG. 27(b4) shows the period during which the movie image G2 dedicated for the longest period is displayed, and FIG. 27(b5) shows the remaining time image G3. Indicates the period in which is displayed.

At timing t1, a game round having the longest period starts as shown in FIG. 27(b1). In this case, as shown in FIG. 27(b2), variable display of symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. After that, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, and furthermore, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped at the timing t2, so that at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 27 (b2), The ready-to-reach display is ended and the ready-to-reach display is started as shown in FIG. 27 (b3).

Thereafter, at the timing t3, the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period starts as shown in FIG. 27(b4), and furthermore, at the timing t3, the display of the remaining time image G3 starts as shown in FIG. 27(b5). Begins. Then, at timing t4, as shown in FIGS. 27(b3) and 27(b4), the display of the movie image G2 dedicated for the longest period is ended, and the ready-to-reach display is ended. Further, at the timing t4, the time displayed in the remaining time image G3 becomes 0 seconds, and the remaining time image G3 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 27(b5). Thereafter, the final stop period passes at timing t5, and the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 27(b1).

As described above, when the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is started, the display of the remaining time image G3 is started. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode for the maximum number of rounds, which is a high-frequency winning mode, will occur when the movie image G2 dedicated for the longest period starts to be displayed, and the movie image G2 dedicated for the longest period will be activated. It is possible to prevent the player's attention to the display from decreasing due to the display of the remaining time image G3.

Returning to the description of the performance pattern determination process (FIG. 25), after reading the data table for the game round performance into the sound and light side RAM 84 in step S1704, the first extension command, second extension command, and It is determined whether any of the third extension commands has been received (step S1705). If any one of the first extension command, second extension command, and third extension command has been received (step S1705: YES), a process of extending the fluctuation continuation period is executed (step S1706). In the fluctuation continuation period extension process, if the first extension command has been received, the fluctuation duration of the gaming session grasped in step S1701 is extended by one second, and if the second extension command has been received, For example, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times ascertained in step S1701 is extended by 2 seconds, and if the third extension command has been received, the fluctuation continuation period of the game times ascertained in step S1701 is extended by 3 seconds. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the fluctuation continuation period of the game times ascertained by the sound-light side MPU 82 the same as the fluctuation continuation period of the game times ascertained by the main side MPU 62.

Thereafter, data table correction processing is executed (step S1707). In the data table modification process, a process is executed to modify the contents of the data table for the game run performance read out to the sound-light side RAM 84 in step S1704 in accordance with the extension of the variation duration of the game run. Modification of the data table for game rendition will be explained below.

FIGS. 28(a) to 28(c) are time charts for explaining how symbols are displayed variably in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41. FIG. 28(a) shows a case where the fluctuation duration of the game round is 5 seconds, the fluctuating display of symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped sequentially, and the reach display does not occur, and FIG. 28(c) shows a case where the variation duration of the game cycle is 2 seconds, the variation display of symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped at the same time, and the reach display does not occur. FIG. 28(c) shows the case where the variation duration of the game cycle is 20 seconds. This shows a case in which the fluctuating display of symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is sequentially stopped and a ready-to-reach display occurs. In addition, FIGS. 28(a1), 28(b1), and 28(c1) show the periods during which symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the upper symbol row Z1, and FIGS. 28(a2), 28(b2) 28(c2) shows the period in which the symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the middle symbol row Z2, and FIG. 28(a3), FIG. 28(b3), and FIG. Indicates the period during which symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

When the fluctuation duration of the game round is 5 seconds and the fluctuation display of symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped sequentially and the reach display does not occur, as shown in FIGS. 28(a1) to 28(a3) At timing t1, variable display of symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. In this case, the high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that it is visually impossible or difficult to identify each symbol displayed within the display surface 41a in all the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3. It will be done. After that, first, at timing t2 for the upper symbol row Z1, the high-speed fluctuation display is changed to the low-speed fluctuation display so that each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in the upper symbol row Z1 can be easily identified visually. The display is switched, and the fluctuating display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped at the subsequent timing t3, as shown in FIG. 28(a1). Thereafter, the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from a high-speed fluctuation display to a low-speed fluctuation display so that each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in the lower symbol row Z3 can be easily identified visually, and at the timing of t4. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(a3), the fluctuating display of symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. Thereafter, for the medium symbol row Z2, the high speed fluctuation display is switched to the low speed fluctuation display so that each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in the medium symbol row Z2 can be easily identified visually, and at the timing of t5. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(a2), the fluctuating display of symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped. In the above case, from timing t1 to timing t2, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that it is visually impossible or difficult to identify each symbol in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

When the fluctuation duration of a game round is 2 seconds and the fluctuation display of symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped at the same time and the reach display does not occur, as shown in FIGS. 28(b1) to 28(b3) At timing t11, variable display of symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. In this case, the high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that it is visually impossible or difficult to identify each symbol displayed within the display surface 41a in all the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3. It will be done. Thereafter, at timing t12, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be easily identified visually. Thereafter, at timing t13, as shown in FIGS. 28(b1) to 28(b3), the variable display of symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped. In the above case, from the timing t11 to the timing t12, a high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that it is visually impossible or difficult to identify each symbol in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

When the fluctuation duration of a game round is 20 seconds and the fluctuating display of symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped sequentially and the reach display occurs, as shown in FIGS. 28(c1) to 28(c3). At timing t21, variable display of symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started. In this case, the high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that it is visually impossible or difficult to identify each symbol displayed within the display surface 41a in all the symbol rows of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3. It will be done. After that, first, at timing t22 for the upper symbol row Z1, the high-speed fluctuation display is changed to the low-speed fluctuation display so that each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in the upper symbol row Z1 can be easily identified visually. The display is switched, and the fluctuating display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped at the subsequent timing t23, as shown in FIG. 28(c1). Thereafter, for the lower symbol row Z3, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in the lower symbol row Z3 can be easily identified visually, and at the timing t24. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(c3), the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. At the timing t24, a combination of ready-to-win symbols is formed by the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, thereby starting the ready-to-win display. Thereafter, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that each symbol displayed on the display surface 41a in the medium symbol row Z2 can be easily identified in appearance in a situation where the reach display is being executed, At timing t25, the fluctuating display of symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped as shown in FIG. 28(c2). In the above case, from timing t21 to timing t22, high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that it is visually impossible or difficult to identify each symbol in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

As mentioned above, no matter which variation duration period the fluctuating period of the game cycle is, after the fluctuating display of symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 starts, all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 will be displayed for a predetermined high-speed fluctuating display period. In Z3, a high-speed fluctuating display is performed so that it is visually impossible or difficult to identify each symbol. In this case, if the continuation period of fluctuation in game times is extended, this high-speed fluctuation display period is extended.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a data table for game performance.

In the data table for game play, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the target game time is set, and information on the content of the task is set in correspondence with each pointer information. ing. The information on the content of the task is information that is set to perform a production corresponding to the current game round, and the display light emitting unit 53 is set so that a production corresponding to the information on the content of the task is executed in each frame. Light emission control and sound output control of the speaker section 54 are executed.

In the data table for game rendition shown in FIG. 29, the pointer information of "0" is set to the data at the start of fluctuation, and the pointer information of "160" is set to the low speed in the fluctuation display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1. The data at the start of the fluctuating display is set, the pointer information for "200" is set for the data at the time the fluctuating display of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 stops, and the pointer information for "300" is set for the data at the bottom. The data when the fluctuating display of symbols in symbol row Z3 stops is set, the pointer information of "400" is set with the data at the start of the preview performance, and the pointer information of "700" is set when the super reach starts. Data at the time is set, and data at the time when the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped is set in the pointer information of "1400". Data for updating the contents of the performance between each timing is set in pointer information other than these.

In such a data table for game rendition, pointer information from "0" to "160" is displayed in high-speed fluctuations so that it is visually impossible or difficult to identify each symbol in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. This is a high-speed fluctuation display period in which Therefore, when the fluctuation duration of the game times is extended, by adding pointer information for the period corresponding to the current extension to the pointer information range of "0" to "160", The range of pointer information corresponding to high-speed fluctuation display will be increased by the period corresponding to this extension. Then, the combination of pointer information after "161" and the corresponding task content information is shifted backward by the added pointer information. Furthermore, data for continuing the performance corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display is written in the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information added in the range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display. When adding the pointer information, if the first extension command is received from the main MPU 62, pointer information corresponding to one second is added to the range of pointer information corresponding to high-speed fluctuation display, and the main side When the second extension command is received from the MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to 2 seconds is added to the range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and the third extension command is received from the main MPU 62. If so, pointer information corresponding to 3 seconds is added to the range of pointer information corresponding to high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, the data table for the game run production stored in the sound-light side ROM 83 in advance is modified in accordance with the extension of the variation continuation period of the current game run.

Here, as already explained, after the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) is executed in the main side command corresponding process (FIG. 22) of the sound/light side MPU 82, the effect pattern determination process (step S1403) is executed. A pattern command corresponding to the read data table for game rotation performance and a stop result command corresponding to the information on the stop symbols determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S1703) are transmitted to the display side MPU 92. In this case, if the data table correction process (step S1707) is not executed in the sound and light side MPU 82, the data table for the game animation read out to the sound and light side RAM 84 in the data table readout process (step S1704) A pattern command in which information corresponding to is set is transmitted to the display-side MPU 92. In addition, when the data table correction process (step S1707) is executed in the sound and light side MPU 82, it corresponds to the data table for game rendition read out to the sound and light side RAM 84 in the data table readout process (step S1704). A pattern command is sent to the display side MPU 92, in which not only the information to change but also the information corresponding to the extended period of the variation continuation period of the game time is set.

When the display side MPU 92 receives a pattern command and a stop result command, first, in the pattern command, information corresponding to the data table for game rendition read out to the sound and light side RAM 84 in the data table read processing (step S1704) is read out. Then, a display data table corresponding to the combination of information corresponding to the stop result command is read from the display side ROM 93 to the display side RAM 94. The data structure of the display data table is basically the same as the data table for game play, and specifically, pointer information is set for the number of frames corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the target game play. Information on the content of the task is set in correspondence with each pointer information. The task content information in the display data table is information set to display a video corresponding to the current game round, and images are displayed in accordance with the task content information in each frame. This is information for controlling the display of the symbol display device 41 so as to

In this case, if the received pattern command includes information corresponding to the extended period of the variation duration of the game, the same process as the data table correction process (step S1707) in the sound-light side MPU 82 is performed. , the range of pointer information corresponding to high-speed fluctuation display in the display data table is increased by the period corresponding to this extension. Then, the pointer information that follows the range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed variable display and the information on the contents of the task corresponding thereto are shifted backward by the added pointer information. Furthermore, data for continuing the high-speed fluctuating display is written in the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information added within the range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuating display. When adding the pointer information, if the first extension command is received from the main MPU 62, pointer information corresponding to one second is added to the range of pointer information corresponding to high-speed fluctuation display, and the main side When the second extension command is received from the MPU 62, the pointer information corresponding to 2 seconds is added to the range of pointer information corresponding to the high-speed fluctuation display, and the third extension command is received from the main MPU 62. If so, pointer information corresponding to 3 seconds is added to the range of pointer information corresponding to high-speed fluctuation display. As a result, the display data table previously stored in the display side ROM 93 is modified in accordance with the extension of the variation duration of the current game round.

When the fluctuation duration of the game round is extended as described above, the high-speed fluctuation display period in which high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that it becomes visually impossible or difficult to identify each symbol in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is extended. It will be extended. As a result, it is possible to extend the duration of fluctuations in game times without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the variation duration of the game cycle is extended, the data table for the game cycle production stored in advance in the sound-light side ROM 83 is modified in accordance with the extension of the variation duration of the current game cycle, and the data table is displayed. The display data table stored in the side ROM 93 in advance is corrected in accordance with the extension of the variable continuation period of the current game round. This eliminates the need to previously store in the ROMs 83 and 93 data tables for game round performance and display data tables corresponding to the extension of the variable continuation period of game rounds. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to an extension of the period of variation in game times while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity in the ROMs 83 and 93.

Next, the final stop period selection process executed in step S704 of the special symbol fluctuation process (FIG. 15) in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30(a).

If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1801: NO), the first final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S1802). The first final stop period is 0.5 seconds. If the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1801: YES), the second final stop period is selected as the final stop period of the current game round (step S1803). The second final stop period is 3 seconds. Note that the second reference value is "30" as already explained.

As described above, when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game round executed in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of a game in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode will not be activated. However, the final stop period of the game will be longer. Then, as the final stop period of the game round becomes longer, the number of times the game round occurs per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time becomes lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

If the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, the final stop period of the game will not be extended, and the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games will not be extended. When the mode occurs three times, the final stop period of the game is extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of times a game occurs per unit time.

Next, the opening period selection process executed in step S803 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 16) in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30(b).

If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1811: NO), the first opening period is selected as the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S1812). The first opening period is 4 seconds. If the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1811: YES), the second opening period is selected as the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S1813). The second opening period is 10 seconds. Note that the second reference value is "30" as already explained.

As described above, when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode that occurs in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode will become longer. As the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode becomes longer, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

The opening period of the opening/closing execution mode will not be extended if the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, and the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games will not be extended. If the mode occurs three times, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs per unit time.

Next, the interval period selection process executed in step S1006 of the special power release process (FIG. 18) in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30(c).

If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1821: NO), the first interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S1822). The first interval period is 2 seconds. If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1821: YES), the second interval period is selected as the current interval period (step S1823). The second interval period is 6 seconds. Note that the second reference value is "30" as already explained.

As described above, when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode that occurs in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode will become longer. As the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode becomes longer, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

If the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode will not be extended, and the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games will not be extended. If the mode occurs three times, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time.

Addition to the total round number counter 64c is performed when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and does not occur during the opening/closing execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the interval period from suddenly becoming longer during the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the ending period selection process executed in step S1010 of the special power release process (FIG. 18) in the main MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30(d).

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is less than the second reference value (step S1831: NO), the first ending period is selected as the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S1832). The first ending period is 6 seconds. If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S1831: YES), the second ending period is selected as the ending period of the current opening/closing execution mode (step S1833). The second ending period is 12 seconds. Note that the second reference value is "30" as already explained.

As described above, when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode that occurs in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode will become longer. As the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode becomes longer, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

If the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode will not be extended, and the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games will not be extended. If the mode occurs three times, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs per unit time.

Next, if the opening/closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any gaming times in the low-frequency support mode, the opening/closing execution mode per unit time The manner in which the regulation regarding the number of occurrences of ``is generated in stages'' will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 31. FIG. 31(a) shows the progress of the game state, FIG. 31(b) shows how the firing cycle of the game ball changes, and FIG. 31(c) shows how the fluctuation duration of the game round is extended. FIG. 31(d) shows how the final stop period of a game round changes, and FIG. 31(e) shows how the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode change.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability mode, a low frequency support mode, and is not an opening/closing execution mode, a game round that results in a 2R high probability jackpot occurs at timing t1, and at t2. At this timing, the opening/closing execution mode of the round game in the low frequency winning mode triggered by the 2R high sure jackpot result ends. In this case, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is maintained at "0". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31(a), in the gaming state where the high probability mode is in the low frequency support mode from the timing of t2 to the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 31(b), the game ball is As for the firing cycle, the first cycle which is the shortest firing cycle is maintained, and as shown in FIG. 31(c), a situation is maintained in which no extension of the fluctuation duration of game times occurs, and as shown in FIG. 31(d), The final stop period of a game round is a relatively short first final stop period, and as shown in FIG. 31(e), the opening period of the open/close execution mode is a relatively short first opening period, and the opening period of the open/close execution mode is The interval period is a relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31(a), at timing t3, which is the high probability mode and low frequency support mode, a game round with a 5R high probability jackpot result occurs, and at timing t4, the 5R high probability jackpot result occurs. The round game in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the opening/closing execution mode of 5 times ends. In this case, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the mode becomes high-frequency support mode, so "5" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode that has ended this time is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. Ru. Therefore, at the timing t4, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes "5". This value is less than the first reference value of "10". Therefore, in a gaming state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode from timing t4 to timing t5 as shown in FIG. 31(a), the game ball is ejected as shown in FIG. The cycle is maintained at the first cycle, which is the shortest firing cycle, and as shown in FIG. 31(c), a situation is maintained in which no extension of the fluctuation duration of game times occurs, and as shown in FIG. 31(d), The final stop period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first final stopping period, and as shown in FIG. 31(e), the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first opening period, and The period is a relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31(a), a game round that results in a 10R high-probability jackpot occurs at timing t5, which is the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode, and at timing t6, the 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs. The opening/closing execution mode of 10 rounds of round games in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by this ends. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is maintained after the opening/closing execution mode ends, "10" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode that has ended this time is set in the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. will be added. Therefore, at the timing t6, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes "15". This value is greater than or equal to the first reference value of "10" and less than the second reference value of "30". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31(a), in a gaming state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode from timing t6 to timing t7, the game ball is not launched as shown in FIG. 31(b). The period becomes the second period, which is the second shortest firing period, and as shown in FIG. 31(c), a situation arises in which the period of variation in game times is extended by one step (ie, 1 second). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31(d), the final stop period of the game round is a relatively short first final stop period, and as shown in FIG. 31(e), the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively short. This is the first opening period, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31(a), a game round that results in a 10R low probability jackpot occurs at timing t7, which is the high probability mode and high frequency support mode, and at timing t8, the 10R low probability jackpot result occurs. The opening/closing execution mode of 10 rounds of round games in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by this ends. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is maintained after the opening/closing execution mode ends, "10" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode that has ended this time is set in the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. will be added. Therefore, at the timing t8, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes "25". This value is greater than or equal to the first reference value of "10" and less than the second reference value of "30". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 31(a), in the gaming state that is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, the game ball launches as shown in FIG. 31(b). The period is maintained at the second period, which is the second shortest firing period, and as shown in FIG. 31(c), a situation is maintained in which one stage of extension (i.e., 1 second) occurs with respect to the duration of fluctuation of the game times. As shown in FIG. 31(d), the final stop period of the game round is a relatively short first final stop period, and as shown in FIG. 31(e), the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively short. This is the first opening period, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is a relatively short first ending period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 31(a), at timing t9, which is the low probability mode and high frequency support mode, a game round that results in a 10R high probability jackpot occurs, and at timing t10, the 10R high probability jackpot result occurs. The opening/closing execution mode of 10 round games in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by this ends. In this case, since the high-frequency support mode is maintained after the opening/closing execution mode ends, "10" corresponding to the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode that has ended this time is set in the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. will be added. Therefore, at the timing t10, the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes "35". This value is greater than or equal to the second reference value of "30" and less than the third reference value of "60". Therefore, in the gaming state that is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode from timing t10 to timing t11 as shown in FIG. 31(a), the game ball is not ejected as shown in FIG. The cycle is the third cycle, which is the second longest firing cycle, and as shown in Figure 31(c), the period of fluctuation in game times is extended by two stages (i.e., 2 seconds). As shown in 31(d), the final stop period of the game round is a relatively long second final stop period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 31(a), a game round with a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs at timing t11, and a round game in the high-frequency winning mode triggered by the 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs at timing t12. The opening/closing execution mode ends ten times, but in the opening/closing execution mode, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode becomes a relatively long second opening period, as shown in FIG. 31(e), and the opening/closing execution mode ends. The interval period becomes a relatively long second interval period, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode becomes a relatively long second ending period.

As mentioned above, the situation in which the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is regulated is that a game round that results in a 10R low-probability jackpot occurs, and the opening/closing execution mode that was triggered by that game round ends, and then The game mode is canceled when 80 game rounds are executed without a jackpot result in the started low probability mode and high frequency support mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. In other words, when the support mode becomes the low-frequency support mode, the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0", so that the game ball firing cycle returns to the first cycle, which is the shortest firing cycle. , the situation returns to the situation where no extension of the fluctuation duration of the game time occurs, the final stop period of the game time returns to the relatively short first final stop period, and the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode returns to the relatively short first stop period. The opening period returns to the opening period, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode returns to the relatively short first interval period, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode returns to the relatively short first ending period.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The larger the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes, the longer the firing cycle of the game ball becomes. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball firing cycle will be longer. Become. As the firing cycle of game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

The firing period of the game ball increases in stages as the value of the total round number counter 64c increases. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more The firing cycle of game balls becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to impose regulations on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time in accordance with the amount of profit given to the player.

If the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played five times occurs only once, the firing cycle of the game ball is maintained at 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small winning result is executed, the total number of rounds counter 64c is not added. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the game area PA even when there is no substantial profit in providing game balls. .

Addition to the total round number counter 64c is performed when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and does not occur during the opening/closing execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball firing cycle from suddenly becoming longer during the opening/closing execution mode.

The larger the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main side RAM 64 becomes, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game times executed in the high frequency support mode becomes. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode will not be activated. However, the period during which the number of games fluctuates will become longer. Then, as the duration of fluctuation of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time becomes lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

The extension of the variation continuation period of the game rounds increases in stages as the value of the total round number counter 64c increases. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more The duration of fluctuation in game times becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to impose regulations on the number of times a game occurs per unit time in accordance with the amount of profit given to the player.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the round game is played five times occurs only once, the fluctuating period of the game times will not be extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of times a game occurs per unit time.

When the fluctuating duration of the game is changed according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, instead of changing the various period tables and the processing mode of the period acquisition process (step S614), various period tables are used. The fluctuation continuation period of the game times acquired in the period acquisition process (step S614) is changed. As a result, it is possible to change the variable continuation period of the game round according to the value of the total round number counter 64c without changing the various period tables and the processing mode of the period acquisition process (step S614). Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complexity of the configurations of the various period tables and the period acquisition process (step S614).

In the first extension process of the fluctuation continuation period (step S1603), which is executed when the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value, the period acquisition process (step S614) is performed. The fixed first extension period is set to the variable continuation period of the gaming session determined in the period acquisition process (step S614), regardless of the variable continuation period of the gaming session determined using the various period tables in step S614. to add. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for extending the period of variation in game times. This also applies to the second extension process of the fluctuation continuation period (step S1606) and the third extension process of the fluctuation continuation period (step S1609).

When the fluctuation continuation period of a game round is extended, the high-speed fluctuation display period in which high-speed fluctuation display is performed so that it becomes visually impossible or difficult to identify each symbol in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is extended. As a result, it is possible to extend the duration of fluctuations in game times without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

When the variation duration of the game cycle is extended, the data table for the game cycle production stored in advance in the sound-light side ROM 83 is modified in accordance with the extension of the variation duration of the current game cycle, and the data table is displayed. The display data table stored in the side ROM 93 in advance is corrected in accordance with the extension of the variable continuation period of the current game round. This eliminates the need to previously store in the ROMs 83 and 93 data tables for game round performance and display data tables corresponding to the extension of the variable continuation period of game rounds. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to an extension of the period of variation in game times while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity in the ROMs 83 and 93.

When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, when a game round that results in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs, the longest period is selected, so that the low frequency If the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the support mode, the 10R low-probability jackpot result and the 10R high-probability jackpot result The duration of fluctuation in game times becomes extremely long. Then, as the duration of fluctuation in game times becomes longer, it takes a longer time until the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Even in a situation where the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or higher than the third reference value, even if a game round that results in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a 5R high-probability jackpot result occurs, the fluctuation continuation period of the game play The maximum period is not selected, but a period shorter than the maximum period is selected. As a result, while the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode, which is a high-frequency winning mode and has the largest number of rounds, is delayed by prolonging the period of fluctuation in game times, the longest period is excessively selected as the period of fluctuation in game times. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

In the game round in which the variation continuation period of the game round is the longest period, the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed on the symbol display device 41. When the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed, a remaining time is displayed in the upper left corner of the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41 to notify the remaining time of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period. Image G3 is displayed. Since the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period ends when the variable continuation period of the game session has elapsed, it can be said that the remaining time image G3 is notifying the remaining time of the variable continuation period of the game session. By displaying the remaining time image G3 in this way, when the fluctuation continuation period of a game session becomes the longest period, the player can grasp the remaining time of the fluctuation continuation period of the game session. This makes it possible to alleviate the player's anxiety about not being able to finish the game for a long time.

When the display of the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is started, the display of the remaining time image G3 is started. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode for the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, will occur when the movie image G2 dedicated for the longest period starts to be displayed, and the movie image G2 dedicated for the longest period It is possible to prevent the player's attention level to the display of the remaining time image G3 from decreasing due to the display of the remaining time image G3.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game round executed in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode will not be activated. However, the final stop period of the game will be longer. Then, as the final stop period of the game round becomes longer, the number of times the game round occurs per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time becomes lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

If the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, the final stop period of the game will not be extended, and the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games will not be extended. When the mode occurs three times, the final stop period of the game is extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of times a game occurs per unit time.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode that occurs in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode will become longer. As the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode becomes longer, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

The opening period of the opening/closing execution mode will not be extended if the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, and the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games will not be extended. If the mode occurs three times, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs per unit time.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode that occurs in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode will become longer. As the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode becomes longer, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

If the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode will not be extended, and the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games will not be extended. If the mode occurs three times, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs per unit time.

Addition to the total round number counter 64c is performed when the opening/closing execution mode ends, and does not occur during the opening/closing execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the interval period from suddenly becoming longer during the opening/closing execution mode.

When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode that occurs in the high frequency support mode becomes longer. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode will become longer. As the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode becomes longer, the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

If the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games occurs only twice, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode will not be extended, and the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode with 10 round games will not be extended. If the mode occurs three times, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs per unit time.

In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode ends, the number of round games that have occurred in the opening/closing execution mode is added to the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, when the opening/closing execution mode based on the high frequency winning mode is started, the number of round games occurring in the opening/closing execution mode may be added to the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. In addition, instead of this configuration, when the game round that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode ends, the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode is calculated by the total number of rounds counter in the main side RAM 64. 64c may be adopted. Thereby, it becomes possible to start early the firing cycle of game balls according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, and the lengthening of the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode in the middle of the gaming round that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode and before the final stop period of the gaming round starts. It may be configured such that it is added to the total round number counter 64c of the side RAM 64. As a result, it is possible to start early the firing period of the game ball according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the final stop period of the game round, and the lengthening of the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode. It becomes possible.

In addition, when a game round that triggers a shift to the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode is started, the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode is added to the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main side RAM 64. It may also be a configuration. As a result, the firing period of the game ball according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the continuous period of fluctuation of the game time, the final stop period of the game time, and the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are lengthened. This makes it possible to start early.

Further, the round games to be added to the total round number counter 64c are not limited to the round games in the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode, and the opening/closing execution mode in the low-frequency winning mode and the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. A configuration may be adopted in which a round game executed in any of the execution modes is subject to addition to the total round number counter 64c.

Furthermore, all of the round games in the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode are not limited to the configuration in which the total number of rounds is added to the total number counter 64c, and the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode and in the opening/closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds is not limited to the configuration. A configuration may be adopted in which the round games are subject to addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c, while the other round games are not subject to addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c. In addition, round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R high probability jackpot result are subject to addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c, while other round games are not subject to addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c. Good too.

Further, the open duration period of the round game may be configured to include not only a long period mode and a short period mode, but also a medium period mode that is a period between these modes. In this case, among the round games that are short-term mode, the round games that are medium-term mode, and the round games that are long-term mode, only the number of round games that are long-term mode is subject to addition to the total number of rounds counter 64c. Alternatively, the number of round games in a long-term mode and the number of round games in a medium-term mode may be added to the total round number counter 64c. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which all the times of the round game that is a mode and the round game that is a short-term mode are to be added to the total round number counter 64c.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the parameters for generating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration regarding the discharge of game balls that have flown down the game area PA. In this embodiment, the following detection sensors 142a to 149a are provided in place of the various winning prize detection sensors 66a to 66e in the first embodiment.

Similar to the first embodiment, the gaming area PA is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, and an out opening 24a. A game ball that enters any of these general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and out opening 24a is ejected from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball ejected from the game ball launch mechanism 27 and supplied to the game area PA is sent to any of the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. When the ball hits the crab, it will be ejected from the game area PA. A game ball that enters any of the general winning opening 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating opening 33, second operating opening 34, and out opening 24a is guided to the back side of the gaming board 24.

On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passages 142 to 148 are formed to correspond to the general winning opening 31, the special winning winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 142 to 148 flow down the discharge passages 142 to 148 into which they have flowed, and are guided to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and then to the discharge ball collection part (not shown). will be collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharged ball collection section are discharged to a ball circulation device of the island equipment in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Each of the discharge passages 142 to 148 is provided with various detection sensors 142a to 148a for detecting game balls. The discharge passage sections 142 to 148 and the detection sensors 142a to 148a will be explained below. Since there are four general winning openings 31, there are discharge passages 142 to 144 corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 142a, 143a is provided. Specifically, the first winning a prize opening detection sensor 142a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage part 142, and the detection range is located in the middle of the second discharge passage part 143. A second winning a prize opening detection sensor 143a is provided so as to exist. The game ball that entered the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 142a while passing through the first discharge passage section 142, and the game ball that entered the general winning hole 31 on the right side is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 142a. The ball is detected by the second winning a prize opening detection sensor 143a while passing through the second discharge passage section 143. Further, a third discharge passage portion 144 is provided for the two right-side general winning ports 31 so as to merge at an intermediate position. The third discharge passage section 144 has an inlet side area corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one outlet side area by merging the inlet side areas in the middle. are doing. The third winning a prize opening detection sensor 144a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage section 144. A game ball that enters one of the two general winning holes 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 144a while passing through the third discharge passage section 144.

A fourth discharge passage section 145 is provided corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32. A special electric detection sensor 145a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage part 145, and the game ball that enters the special electric winning device 32 is on the way to pass through the fourth discharge passage part 145. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 145a. A fifth discharge passage portion 146 is provided corresponding to the first operating port 33 . A first operating port detection sensor 146a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 146, and the game ball that enters the first operating port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 146. It is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 146a while passing through. A sixth discharge passage portion 147 is provided corresponding to the second operating port 34 . A second operating port detection sensor 147a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 147, and the game ball that enters the second operating port 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 147. While passing, it is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 147a. A seventh discharge passage portion 148 is provided corresponding to the out port 24a. An out port detection sensor 148a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage section 148, and the game ball that enters the out port 24a is on the way to pass through the seventh discharge passage section 148. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 148a.

Note that a game ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 142a to 148a will not be detected by any of the other detection sensors 142a to 148a. Further, a gate detection sensor 149a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 while flowing down the gaming area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 149a.

Although electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 142a to 149a, any sensor can be used as long as it can detect each game ball individually. Further, the various detection sensors 142a to 149a are electrically connected to the main MPU 62, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 142a to 149a are output to the main MPU 62. Specifically, the various detection sensors 142a to 149a output a LOW level signal when a game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the main side RAM 64 used for managing the ball payout rate. Note that in this embodiment, the main side RAM 64 is not provided with a total round number counter 64c.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main side RAM 64 is provided with an area 150 for the number of balls entered. The entered ball number area 150 is provided with a general winning counter 151, a special winning winning counter 152, a first operating counter 153, a second operating counter 154, and an out counter 155. Various counters 151 to 155 in the number of entered balls area 150 measure the number of entered game balls in all gaming states without distinguishing between gaming states. All gaming states specifically include a gaming state that is neither open/close execution mode nor high-frequency support mode, a gaming state that is open/close execution mode, and a gaming state that is high-frequency support mode.

The general prize winning counter 151 is a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the general prize winning hole 31 from a predetermined timing to start counting. The special electric winning prize counter 152 is a counter for counting the number of game balls that enter the special electric winning prize device 32 from a predetermined timing of starting measurement. The first operation counter 153 is a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 from a predetermined timing of starting measurement. The second operation counter 154 is a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 from a predetermined timing of starting measurement. The out counter 155 is a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the out port 24a from a predetermined timing of starting measurement.

The various counters 151 to 155 in the ball entry area 150 are used to count the number of game balls that have entered the target ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. used. Specifically, in all the gaming states described above, one game ball is placed in the general winning hole 31 based on the detection results of the first winning hole detection sensor 142a, the second winning hole detection sensor 143a, and the third winning hole detection sensor 144a. When it is determined that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32, the value of the general winning counter 151 is incremented by 1, and it is determined that one game ball has entered the special electric winning device 32 based on the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 145a. In this case, the value of the special electric winning counter 152 is incremented by 1, and when it is specified that one game ball has entered the first operating port 33 based on the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 146a, When the value of the first operation counter 153 is incremented by 1 and it is specified that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34 based on the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 147a, the second operation is performed. The value of the counter 154 is incremented by 1, and when it is determined that one game ball has entered the out port 24a based on the detection result of the out port detection sensor 148a, the value of the out counter 155 is incremented by 1. .

The main RAM 64 is provided with a management area 160, a calculation area 171, and a write pointer 172 in addition to the number of balls entered area 150. Using these management area 160, calculation area 171, and writing pointer 172, the ball output rate for a predetermined period is calculated. The ball output rate is the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in all gaming states to the total number of game balls discharged. When the values of the various counters 151 to 155 in the number of balls entered area 150 are K1 to K5, the ball output rate is as follows.

Total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K2 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "Prize for winning in the first operating opening 33" Number of balls" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5).

The management area 160 is provided with 60 storage areas 161 to 166 for storing information on the unit ball output rate when a predetermined unit number of 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA. . That is, the management area 160 is provided with first to sixtieth storage areas 161 to 166. The first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 all have the same storage capacity, and each has a storage capacity that can store information on the unit ball output rate.

The calculation area 171 calculates information on the unit ball output rate when a predetermined unit number of 100 game balls are discharged from the gaming area PA using the values of various counters 151 to 155 in the number of balls entered area 150. Used in cases. The write pointer 172 is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to grasp the storage areas 161 to 166 to which the unit ball output rate is written among the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160. be. When a new unit ball output rate is calculated by ejecting 100 game balls, which is the predetermined unit number, from the game area PA, the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160 are Among them, the storage areas 161 to 166 corresponding to the value of the write pointer 172 are overwritten with the new unit ball output rate information, and then 1 is added to the value of the write pointer 172. In this case, the value of the write pointer 172 takes a value from "0" to "59", and if the value of the write pointer 172 is "n", a new unit payout is placed in the (n+1)th storage area in the management area 160. Rate information will be overwritten. Further, if the value of the write pointer 172 exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 172 as a result of adding 1, the write pointer 172 is cleared to "0".

As described above, the management area 160 is provided with 60 storage areas 161 to 166 capable of storing information on the unit ball output rate when a predetermined unit number of 100 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA. There is. Therefore, if information on the unit ball output rate is stored in all of the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160, 6000 game balls, which is the calculation standard number, will be distributed from the game area PA. The management area 160 stores information that allows calculation of information on the target ball output rate when the ball is ejected. Every time a predetermined unit number of 100 game balls are ejected from the game area PA, the main MPU 62 calculates the unit ball output rate corresponding to the ejection of the 100 game balls, and In addition to overwriting the unit ball output rate information in the storage areas 161 to 166 indicated by the write pointer 172 among the 1st to 60th storage areas 161 to 166, the information in the 1st to 60th storage areas immediately after the overwriting is performed. By adding up all unit ball output rate information stored in areas 161 to 166 and dividing the addition result by "60", which is the number in storage areas 161 to 166, it is possible to calculate the calculation standard number of game balls to be ejected. Calculate the target ball payout rate. Then, the calculated target ball payout rate information is overwritten in the target ball payout rate area 173 provided in the main side RAM 64. In this embodiment, the information on the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 becomes a parameter for generating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the ball payout rate monitoring process executed by the main MPU 62. Note that the ball payout rate monitoring process is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10).

If the front door frame 14 is not in the open state (step S1901: NO), ball entry management processing is executed (step S1902). FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing ball entry management processing.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 142a (step S2001: YES), that is, the signal received from the first winning opening detection sensor 142a is switched from LOW level to HI level. If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 143a (step S2003: YES), that is, the signal received from the second winning hole detection sensor 143a When it is confirmed that the has switched from the LOW level to the HI level, or when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 144a (step S2005: YES), that is, the third winning hole When it is confirmed that the signal received from the detection sensor 144a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the value of the general winning counter 151 is incremented by 1 (step S2002, step S2004, step S2006). In addition, the detection results of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 142a to 144a are also monitored in the winning detection processing (step S209) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 10), and the detection results of the first to third winning opening detection sensors 142a to 144a are monitored. If it is determined that one game ball has been detected in any of the above, a process is executed so that the number of game balls corresponding to the general winning hole 31 is paid out.

If it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 145a (step S2007: YES), that is, it is confirmed that the signal received from the special electric detection sensor 145a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If so, 1 is added to the value of the special electric winning counter 152 (step S2008). Note that the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 145a is also monitored in the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), and if it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 145a, A process is executed to cause the number of game balls corresponding to the special electric winning device 32 to be paid out, and a process is executed to specify the trigger for ending the round game.

If it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 146a (step S2009: YES), that is, the signal received from the first operating port detection sensor 146a is switched from LOW level to HI level. If it is confirmed that the change has been made, the value of the first operation counter 153 is incremented by 1 (step S2010). In addition, the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 146a is also monitored in the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), and one game ball is detected by the first operating port detection sensor 146a. If it is determined that the number of game balls corresponding to the first operating port 33 is paid out, a process is executed to make sure that the number of game balls corresponding to the first operating port 33 is paid out, and a process is executed to specify an opportunity to acquire the reservation information on the first special drawing side. do.

If it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 147a (step S2011: YES), that is, the signal received from the second operating port detection sensor 147a is switched from LOW level to HI level. If it is confirmed that the change has been made, the value of the second operation counter 154 is incremented by 1 (step S2012). In addition, the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 147a is also monitored in the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), and one game ball is detected by the second operating port detection sensor 147a. If it is determined that the number of game balls corresponding to the second operating port 34 is paid out, a process is executed to determine the timing for acquiring the reservation information on the second special drawing side. do.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the exit detection sensor 148a (step S2013: YES), that is, the signal received from the exit detection sensor 148a has switched from the LOW level to the HI level. If confirmed, 1 is added to the value of the out counter 155 (step S2014). Note that in the winning detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10), the detection result of the exit detection sensor 148a is not monitored.

By executing the ball entry management process as described above, the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 is measured using the general winning counter 151, and the number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 is counted. The number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 is measured using the first operating counter 153, and the number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 is counted using the special electric winning counter 152. The number of balls is measured using the second operating counter 154, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is measured using the out counter 155. This makes it possible for the main MPU 62 to grasp the history of ball entry into each ball entry section 24a, 31-34.

Returning to the description of the ball output rate monitoring process (FIG. 34), if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901 or if the process in step S1902 is executed, a calculation process for the total number of balls to be discharged is executed (step S1903). In the calculation process of the total number of ejected balls, the value of the general prize counter 151, the value of the special electric prize counter 152, the value of the first operation counter 153, the value of the second operation counter 154, and the value of the out counter 155 in the number of balls entered area 150 are calculated. Compute the sum of values. The result of this calculation becomes the current total number of discharged items. Then, it is determined whether the calculated current total discharge number is equal to or greater than a predetermined unit number of "100" (step S1904). If the current total number of balls discharged is less than the predetermined unit number (step S1904: NO), the main ball output rate monitoring process is ended.

When the current total number of balls to be discharged is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of units (step S1904: YES), calculation processing of the unit ball output rate is executed (step S1905). Specifically, when the values of various counters 151 to 155 in the number of balls entered area 150 are K1 to K5,
Total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K2 x "Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "Prize for winning in the first operating opening 33" The ratio of "number of balls" + K4 x "number of prize balls for winning into the second operating port 34")/total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) is calculated. The calculation area 171 is used for this calculation.

The calculated unit ball output rate information is overwritten in the storage areas 161-166 indicated by the value of the write pointer 172 among the first to 60th storage areas 161-166 of the management area 160 (step S1906). Thereafter, update processing of the write pointer 172 is executed (step S1907). In the update process, 1 is added to the value of the write pointer 172, and if the value after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of the write pointer 172, the write pointer 172 is cleared to "0".

After that, the information on all unit ball payout rates stored in the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 in the management area 160 is added (step S1908), and the total value after the addition is calculated in the management area 160. It is divided by "60" which is the number of storage areas 161 to 166 (step S1909). Then, information on the numerical value obtained by multiplying the division result by 100 is overwritten in the target ball payout rate area 173 as information on the target ball payout rate (step S1910). The target ball payout rate information is binary information, but is expressed as numerical information in the range of "0%" to "999%" in decimal notation. In this case, when the target ball output rate is "100%", the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA and the game when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation standard number, are discharged from the game area PA. This means that the total number of balls paid out is the same. If the target ball output rate is less than 100%, the total number of game balls discharged from the gaming area PA when 6000 game balls, which is the calculation standard number, are discharged from the gaming area PA is the game ball. This means that it is larger than the total number of pieces paid out. If the target ball payout rate exceeds "100%", a game in which the total number of game balls paid out is greater than the calculation standard number of 6000 game balls discharged from the game area PA. This means that it is more than the total number of balls. Thereafter, the general winning counter 151, special electric winning counter 152, first operating counter 153, second operating counter 154, and out counter 155 in the number of balls entered area 150 are each cleared to "0" (step S1911).

By executing the ball output rate monitoring process (FIG. 34) as described above, each time a predetermined unit number of 100 game balls is ejected from the gaming area PA, 6000 game balls, which is the calculation reference number up to that point, are ejected from the gaming area PA. The target ball output rate for each game ball ejected from the game area PA is calculated. This makes it possible to calculate the target ball output rate each time a predetermined unit number of game balls are ejected from the game area PA.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the period setting process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether the value of the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is less than the first reference value (step S2101). The first reference value is set to "134%". If the value of the target ball payout rate is less than the first reference value (step S2101: YES), information corresponding to the first period that allows 100 game balls to be fired per minute is set in the firing period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S2102). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing period. By setting information corresponding to the first period in the firing period area 64b, if the firing control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the firing control unit 78c, a firing instruction signal is sent to the firing control unit 78c every time the first period has elapsed. As a result, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled each time the first cycle elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA each time the first cycle elapses.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined whether the value of the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value ( Step S2103). The second reference value is set to "200%". When the value of the target ball payout rate is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2103: YES). Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables the launch of 90 game balls per minute is set in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S2104). The second period is approximately 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the second period in the firing period area 64b, in the firing control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the firing control section 78c, the second period is set in the firing period area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period passes, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game balls to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined whether the value of the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value ( Step S2105). The third reference value is set to "300%". When the value of the target ball payout rate is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2105: YES). Information corresponding to the third cycle that enables the launch of 80 game balls per minute is set in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S2106). The third period is the second longest firing period, 0.75 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the launch cycle area 64b, in the launch control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the launch control unit 78c, the third cycle is set in the launch cycle area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third period passes, and the game ball is stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game ball to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the amount of rotation is such that the amount of rotation is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the third period passes.

When the value of the target ball payout rate is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2105: NO). Information corresponding to the fourth cycle that enables the launch of 70 game balls per minute is set in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S2107). The fourth period is the longest firing period, approximately 0.86 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the fourth period in the firing period area 64b, in the firing control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the firing control section 78c, the fourth period is set in the firing period area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth period passes, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game balls to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the amount of rotation is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the fourth period passes.

As described above, the larger the value of the target ball output rate becomes, the longer the firing cycle of the game balls becomes. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball firing cycle will be longer. Become. As the firing cycle of game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

The firing cycle of the game balls increases in stages as the value of the target ball output rate increases. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more The firing cycle of game balls becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to impose regulations on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time in accordance with the amount of profit given to the player.

Each time 100 game balls, which is the specified unit number, are discharged from the game area PA, the target ball payout rate is calculated for when 6,000 game balls, which is the previous calculation reference number, are discharged from the game area PA. The game ball launch cycle is then changed according to the calculated target ball payout rate value. This makes it possible to change the game ball launch cycle as appropriate according to changes in the target ball payout rate value even during the open/close execution mode or in the middle of a game round.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating the acquisition process of the fluctuation duration period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the current success/failure judgment result is a jackpot result or a small win result (step S2201: YES), the current judgment result and distribution judgment result become the trigger for execution of the opening/closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode. It is determined whether the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is greater than or equal to the third reference value, which is either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result (step S2202). . The third reference value is the reference value with the largest number among the multiple types of reference values set, and is "300%" as already explained.

If this time is either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, and the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2202: YES), this The longest period among the variable continuation periods of multiple types of game times set in the pachinko machine 10 is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game time (step S2204). As in the first embodiment, the longest period is longer than the longest variation duration among the variation durations set in the first per-time period table. In other words, the longest period acquired in step S2204 is longer than any of the variable continuation periods of game times selected in other situations. Therefore, the period in which the fluctuation continuation period of the gaming session is longest for either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result and the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value. becomes. If the maximum period is selected, the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game time will not occur, and if the maximum period is selected as the fluctuation duration of the game time, the maximum period exclusive period including various images G1 to G3 will be displayed. This embodiment is also similar to the first embodiment in that a movie image is displayed.

In the situation where the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value as described above, if a game round that results in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs, By selecting the longest period, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without playing the game in the low-frequency support mode, The duration of fluctuations in game rounds resulting in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result becomes extremely long. Then, as the duration of fluctuation in game times becomes longer, it takes a longer time until the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

When the process in step S2204 is executed, after transmitting the variation command including the information on the longest period and the type command including the current validity determination result and distribution determination result to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2215 ), period adjustment processing is executed (step S2216). However, in the period adjustment processing after executing the processing of step S2204, the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times does not occur.

Even if this time is either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, if the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is less than the third reference value, and the target ball output rate area Even if the target ball payout rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, if this time is one of the 5R high-probability jackpot result, 2R high-probability jackpot result, and small win result, in step S2203 The winning time period table is read from the main side ROM 63. The contents of the winning time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The processing contents of steps S2205 to S2213 are the same as steps S605 to S613 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the contents of the ready-to-reach period table, the normal period table, and the shortened period table are the same as in the first embodiment.

If the winning period table is read in step S2203, the reach period table is read in step S2206, the normal period table is read in step S2209, the shortening period table is read in step S2210. If the regular period table is read out in step S2212, or if the shortened period table is read out in step S2213, period acquisition processing is executed (step S2214). In the period acquisition process, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, by comparing the acquired numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS against the period table read out as described above, the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round is obtained.

When the process of step S2204 is executed, or when the process of step S2214 is executed, the variation command including the information on the variation duration of the game session acquired this time, and the type including the current validity judgment result and distribution judgment result The command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S2215). The data configurations of these variation commands and type commands are the same as in the first embodiment. Thereafter, period adjustment processing is executed (step S2216).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing period adjustment processing in this embodiment.

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the variable continuation period of the current game round (step S2301: YES), the process for extending the variable continuation period of the game round shown after step S2302 is not executed. If a game session that results in a jackpot occurs in a situation where the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, in step S2204 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 37) The longest period is selected as the fluctuation continuation period for the current game round. In this case, if the longest period has already been selected, by not executing the process for extending the fluctuating duration of gaming times shown after step S2302, the long period of fluctuating duration of gaming times can be It is possible to prevent the changes from being executed cumulatively for the fluctuation duration of one game.

The situation is such that the fluctuation duration of the game round is not the longest period (step S2301: NO), and the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is greater than or equal to the first reference value but less than the second reference value. If so (step S2302: YES), a first extension process of the fluctuation continuation period is executed (step S2303). In the first extension process, similar to step S1603 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the fluctuation duration acquired in step S2214 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 37) is One second will be added as the first extension period. Furthermore, a first extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the first extension period is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S2304). When the sound-light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it understands that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the first extension period, and also updates the data table for the game round production in accordance with the extension. Modify the contents of. The modification of the contents in the data table for the game round performance is performed for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment. Note that the first reference value is "134%" as already explained, and the second reference value is "200%" as already explained.

The situation is such that the fluctuation duration of the game round is not the longest period (step S2301: NO), and the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is greater than or equal to the second standard value but less than the third standard value. If so (step S2305: YES), a second extension process of the fluctuation continuation period is executed (step S2306). In the second extension process, similar to step S1606 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the fluctuation duration period acquired in step S2214 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 37) is Two seconds will be added as the second extension period. Further, a second extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the second extension period is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S2307). When the sound-light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it understands that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the second extension period, and also updates the data table for the game round production in accordance with the extension. Modify the contents of. The modification of the contents in the data table for the game round performance is performed for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment. Note that the third reference value is "300%" as already explained.

In a situation where the fluctuation duration of the game round is not the longest period (step S2301: NO), and the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2308: YES). ), the third extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S2309). In the third extension process, similar to step S1609 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the fluctuation duration period acquired in step S2214 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 37) is Three seconds will be added as the third extension period. Further, a third extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the third extension period is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S2310). When the sound-light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it understands that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the third extension period, and also updates the data table for the game round performance in accordance with the extension. Modify the contents of. The modification of the contents in the data table for the game round performance is performed for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment.

As described above, the larger the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is, the longer the fluctuation duration of the game play executed in the high frequency support mode becomes. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of a game in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode will not be activated. However, the period during which the number of games fluctuates will become longer. As the period of variation of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time becomes lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

The extension of the variation continuation period of the game round becomes gradually longer as the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 increases. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more The duration of fluctuations in game times becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to impose regulations on the number of times a game occurs per unit time in accordance with the amount of profit given to the player.

Every time 100 game balls, which are a predetermined unit number, are ejected from the gaming area PA, the target ball output rate is calculated when 6000 game balls, which are the calculation standard number, are ejected from the gaming area PA. be done. Then, the extension mode of the fluctuation continuation period of the game session is changed according to the value of the calculated target ball payout rate. As a result, a state in which a game session is repeatedly executed in a situation where the mode is high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a state in which a game session is repeatedly executed in a situation where the mode is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, In the normal gaming state, which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode, it is possible to appropriately change the extension mode of the fluctuation continuation period of the game round according to the change in the value of the target ball payout rate. In this case, the extension mode of the variable continuation period of the gaming session can be changed without using the start or end of the opening/closing execution mode as a trigger.

Even in this embodiment, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are changed as appropriate. Specifically, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) is selected as the final stop period of the game if the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is less than the second reference value. If the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected. In addition, for the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, if the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected, and the target ball payout rate area If the target ball payout rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected. In addition, for the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, if the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, the first interval period (2 seconds) is selected, and the target ball output rate area If the target ball payout rate stored in 173 is greater than or equal to the second reference value, the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected. In addition, for the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode, if the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is less than the second reference value, the first ending period (6 seconds) is selected, and the target ball output rate area If the target ball payout rate stored in 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected.

As described above, when the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the opening/closing Execution mode ending period becomes longer. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any gaming times in the low-frequency support mode, the opening/closing execution per unit time Modes occur less often. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which various periods are changed according to the target ball output rate, but also a configuration in which various periods are changed according to any one of the following parameters 1 to 7. good. Specifically, when the values of the various counters 151 to 155 in the number of balls entered area 150 are K1 to K5, the first to seventh parameters are as follows.
- First parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general prize opening 31 K1/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5).
- Second parameter: ratio of total number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 K2/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5).
- Third parameter: ratio of total number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 K3/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5).
- Fourth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls entering the second operating port 34 K4/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5).
・Fifth parameter: (K1 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning slot 31" + K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32")/Total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA Ratio of (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5).
・Sixth parameter: (K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the second operating port 34") / Total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "General "Number of prize balls for winning into the winning opening 31" + K2 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the special electric winning device 32" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning into the first operating port 33" + K4 x "Second operating port 34 The ratio of "number of prize balls awarded to winnings").
・Seventh parameter: K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" / Total number of game balls paid out (K1 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the general winning opening 31" + K2 x "Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32" Ratio of "number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K3 x "number of prize balls for winning in the first operating port 33" + K4 x "number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34").

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is notified. Specifically, a plurality of 7-segment displays may be mounted on the main control board 61, and the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 may be displayed on the plurality of 7-segment displays. good. This makes it possible for the game hall manager to recognize the target ball payout rate. Note that in a configuration in which any one of the first to seventh parameters described above is used instead of the target ball payout rate, the parameter to be used may be notified.

Further, the predetermined number of units is not limited to "100", and may be greater than "100" or may be less than "100". For example, the predetermined number of units may be "1000". In this case, information on the unit ball output rate when 1000 game balls are ejected from the gaming area PA will be stored in each of the first to 60th storage areas 161 to 166 of the management area 160. .

<Third embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the parameters for generating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 39(a) is a flowchart showing the special figure confirmation process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by checking whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter in the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S2401). If a negative determination is made in step S2401, the present special symbol confirmation process is ended as it is.

If the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S2401: YES), the condition is that the judgment result that triggered the current game round is a jackpot result or a small win result (step S2402: YES), execute processing for transitioning to opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, first, opening period selection processing is executed (step S2403). As with the first embodiment, two types of periods are set as the opening period: 4 seconds (first opening period) and 10 seconds (second opening period), and these are set in the opening period selection process. Select one of the two types of periods to be used as the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode.

Thereafter, information on the opening period selected in step S2403 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S2404). As a result, measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

Thereafter, an opening command including information on the currently selected opening period is transmitted to the audio-optical MPU 82 (step S2405). By receiving the opening command, the sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the opening period of the current opening/closing execution mode, starts measuring the opening period, and displays an opening effect corresponding to the current opening period on the light emitting unit 53 and the speaker. It is executed by the section 54. Further, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is caused to perform an opening effect corresponding to the current opening period.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the result of the judgment that triggered the current game round is one of the 5R high-probability jackpot result, the 10R low-probability jackpot result, and the 10R high-probability jackpot result (step S2406). In other words, it is determined whether or not it is a game round that triggers the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2406, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to 1, as shown in the explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the main side RAM 64 in FIG. 39(b). Add (step S2407). In other words, in this embodiment, the main side RAM 64 is not provided with the total number of rounds counter 64c, and instead, an opening/closing execution mode is used in the high-frequency winning mode, which is executed without any game play in the low-frequency support mode. A consecutive game counter 181 is provided for counting the number of consecutive games.

When a negative determination is made in step S2406 or when the process in step S2407 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is incremented by 1 (step S2408). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the value corresponding to the special electric line starting process.

On the other hand, if the judgment result that triggered the current game round is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result (step S2402: NO), the high probability flag in the main side RAM 64 is "0" and the high frequency support is By determining whether the flag is "1" or not, it is a low probability mode and high frequency after the opening/closing execution mode that was triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result in the game round that ended this time. It is determined whether the game was played in a support mode (step S2409).

If it is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S2409: YES), the value of the number of games counter in the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S2410). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the game count of the end standard number of times is executed in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (step S2411). When the value of the number of games counter is "0" (step S2411: YES), the high frequency support flag in the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S2412). This results in a situation where the mode is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

Thereafter, the consecutive game counter 181 in the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S2413). In other words, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is not cleared to "0" even when the mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, but is cleared to "0" when the mode is shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S2409, when a negative determination is made in step S2411, or when the process of step S2413 is executed, the special figure special electric line counter is cleared to "0" (step S2414). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

The addition process to the consecutive game counter 181 (step S2407) is executed only when any of the 5R high-probability jackpot result, 10R low-probability jackpot result, and 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs as described above. After the opening/closing execution mode in which any of these 5R high-probability jackpot results, 10R low-probability jackpot results, and 10R high-probability jackpot results have occurred, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. In addition, as described above, when the support mode is changed from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode in step S2412 of the special map confirmation process (FIG. 39), the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is cleared to "0" and , The transition from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode is executed only in step S2412 of the special figure confirmation process (FIG. 39). Therefore, the consecutive winnings counter 181 is incremented by 1 when the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs, which triggers the transition from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode. If the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs before a game round in the low-frequency support mode starts, 1 is added. In other words, the consecutive game counter 181 measures the number of times the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode is executed without intervening the game times in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, even if there is a 2R high-probability jackpot result in the high-frequency support mode, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the low-frequency winning mode is executed, the consecutive winnings counter 181 will not be incremented. Further, even if there is a small winning result in the high frequency support mode and an opening/closing execution mode similar to the low frequency winning mode is executed based on the result, the consecutive winnings counter 181 will not be incremented. As a result, the consecutive game counter 181 measures the number of times the opening/closing execution mode occurs, in which the payout of game balls is substantially executed, in other words, the player is substantially given a profit.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the cycle setting process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, it is determined whether the value of the consecutive win counter 181 in the main RAM 64 is less than a first reference value (step S2501). The first reference value is set to "2". In other words, even if the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode occurs in the low frequency support mode as a trigger of any of a 5R high probability big win result, a 10R low probability big win result, and a 10R high probability big win result in the low frequency support mode, the value of the consecutive win counter 181 will not reach the first reference value, and furthermore, in the subsequent high frequency support mode, the opening and closing execution mode by the high frequency winning mode occurs again as a trigger of any of a 5R high probability big win result, a 10R low probability big win result, and a 10R high probability big win result in the high frequency support mode, causing the value of the consecutive win counter 181 to reach the first reference value.

When the value of the consecutive games counter 181 is less than the first reference value (step S2501: YES). Information corresponding to the first cycle that enables the launch of 100 game balls per minute is set in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S2502). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the launch cycle area 64b, in the launch control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the launch control unit 78c, the first cycle is set in the launch cycle area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period passes, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game balls to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined whether the value of the consecutive games counter 181 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2503). The second reference value is set to "4". In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the opening/closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs triggered by any of the 5R high-probability jackpot results, 10R low-probability jackpot results, and 10R high-probability jackpot results, and then in the subsequent high-frequency support mode. When the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode occurs three times, triggered by any of the 5R high-probability jackpot results, 10R low-probability jackpot results, and 10R high-probability jackpot results, the value of the consecutive winnings counter 181 becomes the second reference value. reach.

When the value of the consecutive games counter 181 is equal to or greater than the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2503: YES). Information corresponding to the second cycle that enables the launch of 90 game balls per minute is set in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S2504). The second period is approximately 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the second period in the firing period area 64b, in the firing control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the firing control section 78c, the second period is set in the firing period area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period passes, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game balls to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, it is determined whether the value of the consecutive games counter 181 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2505). The third reference value is set to "6". In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the opening/closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode occurs triggered by any of the 5R high-probability jackpot results, 10R low-probability jackpot results, and 10R high-probability jackpot results, and then in the subsequent high-frequency support mode. When the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode occurs five times due to any of the 5R high-probability jackpot results, 10R low-probability jackpot results, and 10R high-probability jackpot results, the value of the consecutive winnings counter 181 becomes the third standard value. reach.

When the value of the consecutive games counter 181 is equal to or greater than the second reference value and less than the third reference value (step S2505: YES). Information corresponding to the third cycle that enables the launch of 80 game balls per minute is set in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S2506). The third period is the second longest firing period, 0.75 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the third cycle in the launch cycle area 64b, in the launch control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the launch control unit 78c, the third cycle is set in the launch cycle area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third period passes, and the game ball is stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game ball to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the amount of rotation is such that the amount of rotation is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the third period passes.

If the value of the consecutive games counter 181 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2505: NO). Information corresponding to the fourth cycle that enables the launch of 70 game balls per minute is set in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S2507). The fourth period is the longest firing period, approximately 0.86 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the fourth period in the firing period area 64b, in the firing control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the firing control section 78c, the fourth period is set in the firing period area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the fourth period passes, and the game ball is stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game ball to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the fourth cycle elapses.

As described above, the larger the value of the consecutive game counter 181, the longer the firing cycle of the game ball becomes. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball firing cycle will be longer. Become. As the firing cycle of game balls becomes longer, the number of game balls entering the game area PA per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time decreases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

The firing cycle of the game ball increases in stages as the value of the consecutive game counter 181 increases. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more The firing cycle of game balls becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to impose regulations on the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time in accordance with the amount of profit given to the player.

If the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs only once, the firing cycle of the game ball is maintained at 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing cycle. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small winning result is executed, addition to the consecutive winnings counter 181 is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent regulations regarding the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the game area PA even when there is no substantial profit in providing game balls. .

Addition to the consecutive home counter 181 is performed before the opening/closing execution mode is started, and does not occur during the opening/closing execution mode. This makes it possible to prevent the firing cycle of game balls from suddenly slowing down in the middle of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, since the addition to the consecutive game counter 181 is performed before the start of the opening/closing execution mode, the firing cycle of the game ball corresponding to the reference value is changed from the start of the opening/closing execution mode, which is the trigger for reaching each reference value. Be changed. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time from the start of the opening/closing execution mode, which is the trigger for reaching each reference value.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating a process for obtaining a fluctuation duration period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the current judgment result is a jackpot result or a small win result (step S2601: YES), the current judgment result and distribution judgment result become the trigger for executing the opening/closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode. It is determined whether the result of the 10R low-probability jackpot or the 10R high-probability jackpot, and the value of the consecutive winnings counter 181 is greater than or equal to the third reference value (step S2602). The third reference value is the reference value with the largest number among the multiple types of reference values set, and is "6" as already explained.

If this time is either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, and the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is greater than or equal to the third reference value (step S2602: YES), this is set in the pachinko machine 10. The longest period among the variable continuation periods of the plurality of types of game times is selected as the variable continuation period of the current game time (step S2604). As in the first embodiment, the longest period is longer than the longest variation duration among the variation durations set in the first per-time period table. In other words, the longest period acquired in step S2604 is longer than any of the variable continuation periods of game times selected in other situations. Therefore, the period of continuous fluctuation of the game round in which either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result and the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value is the longest period. If the maximum period is selected, the extension of the fluctuation duration of the game time will not occur, and if the maximum period is selected as the fluctuation duration of the game time, the maximum period exclusive period including various images G1 to G3 will be displayed. This embodiment is also similar to the first embodiment in that a movie image is displayed.

As described above, when the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the longest period is selected when a game round that results in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs. , If the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the 10R low probability jackpot result and the 10R high The duration of fluctuations in the number of gaming rounds that result in one of the guaranteed jackpot results becomes extremely long. Then, as the duration of fluctuation in game times becomes longer, it takes a longer time until the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, occurs. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

When the process of step S2604 is executed, after transmitting the variation command including the information on the longest period and the type command including the current validity judgment result and distribution judgment result to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2615 ), period adjustment processing is executed (step S2616). However, in the period adjustment processing after executing the processing of step S2604, the extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times does not occur.

Even if this time is either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, if the value of consecutive hits counter 181 is less than the third standard value, or if the value of consecutive hits counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third standard value. Even if there is, if this time is one of the 5R high certainty jackpot result, 2R high certainty jackpot result, and small win result, the winning time period table is read from the main side ROM 63 in step S2603. The contents of the winning time period table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

The processing contents of steps S2605 to S2613 are the same as steps S605 to S613 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the contents of the ready-to-reach period table, the normal period table, and the shortened period table are the same as in the first embodiment.

If the winning period table is read in step S2603, the reach period table is read in step S2606, the normal period table is read in step S2609, the shortening period table is read in step S2610. If the normal period table is read in step S2612, or if the shortened period table is read in step S2613, period acquisition processing is executed (step S2614). In the period acquisition process, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, by comparing the acquired numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS against the period table read out as described above, the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round is obtained.

When the process of step S2604 is executed, or when the process of step S2614 is executed, a variation command including information on the variation duration of the game session acquired this time, and a type including the current validity judgment result and distribution judgment result. The command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S2615). The data configurations of these variation commands and type commands are the same as in the first embodiment. Thereafter, period adjustment processing is executed (step S2616).

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing period adjustment processing in this embodiment.

In the period adjustment process, if the longest period has already been selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round (step S2701: YES), the processing for extending the fluctuation continuation period of the game round shown after step S2702 is not executed. As already explained, when a game session that results in a jackpot occurs in a situation where the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the current game is determined in step S2604 in the fluctuating duration acquisition process (FIG. 41). The longest period is selected as the duration of the fluctuation. In this case, if the longest period is selected, the process for extending the fluctuating duration of gaming times shown in step S2702 and subsequent steps is not executed, thereby extending the fluctuating duration of gaming times. It is possible to prevent this from being executed cumulatively for the variable duration period of one game.

In a situation where the continuous period of variation in game times is not the longest period (step S2701: NO), and the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is greater than or equal to the first reference value but less than the second reference value (step S2702: YES). ), the first extension process of the fluctuation duration period is executed (step S2703). In the first extension process, similar to step S1603 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the fluctuation duration period acquired in step S2614 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 41) is One second will be added as the first extension period. Further, a first extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the first extension period is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S2704). When the sound-light side MPU 82 receives the first extension command, it understands that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the first extension period, and also updates the data table for the game round production in accordance with the extension. Modify the contents of. The modification of the contents in the data table for the game round performance is performed for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment. Note that the first reference value is "2" as already explained, and the second reference value is "4" as already explained.

In a situation where the continuous period of variation in game times is not the longest period (step S2701: NO), and the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is greater than or equal to the second reference value but less than the third reference value (step S2705: YES). ), a second extension process of the fluctuation duration is executed (step S2706). In the second extension process, similar to step S1606 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the fluctuation duration period acquired in step S2614 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 41) is Two seconds will be added as the second extension period. Further, a second extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the second extension period is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S2707). When the sound-light side MPU 82 receives the second extension command, it understands that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the second extension period, and also updates the data table for the game round production in accordance with the extension. Modify the contents of. The modification of the contents in the data table for the game round performance is performed for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment. Note that the third reference value is "6" as already explained.

In a situation where the fluctuation continuation period of the game play is not the longest period (step S2701: NO) and the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is equal to or higher than the third reference value (step S2708: YES), the third fluctuation continuation period Execute extension processing (step S2709). In the second extension process, similar to step S1609 of the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the fluctuation duration period acquired in step S2614 of the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 41) is Three seconds will be added as the third extension period. Further, a third extension command indicating that the variable continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the third extension period is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S2710). When the sound-light side MPU 82 receives the third extension command, it understands that the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round has been extended by the third extension period, and also updates the data table for the game round performance in accordance with the extension. Modify the contents of. The modification of the contents in the data table for the game round performance is performed for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment.

As described above, the larger the value of the consecutive games counter 181, the longer the period of variation in the number of games executed in the high-frequency support mode. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode will not be activated. However, the period during which the number of games fluctuates will become longer. Then, as the duration of fluctuation of the game times becomes longer, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time becomes lower. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

The extension of the variation continuation period of the game round becomes gradually longer as the value of the consecutive game counter 181 increases. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs repeatedly in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play in the low-frequency support mode, the more times it occurs, the more The duration of fluctuation in game times becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to impose regulations on the number of times a game occurs per unit time in accordance with the amount of profit given to the player.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode occurs only once, the fluctuation continuation period of the game round will not be extended. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of times a game occurs per unit time.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small winning result is executed, addition to the consecutive winnings counter 181 is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent regulations regarding the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the game area PA even when there is no substantial profit in providing game balls. .

Even in this embodiment, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are changed as appropriate. Specifically, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) is selected as the final stop period of the game if the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is less than the second reference value, and the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is If it is equal to or greater than the second reference value, the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected. Further, as the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected if the value of the consecutive shots counter 181 is less than the second reference value, and the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected when the value of the consecutive shots counter 181 is equal to or higher than the second reference value. If so, the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected. Further, as the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, the first interval period (2 seconds) is selected if the value of the consecutive shots counter 181 is less than the second reference value, and the first interval period (2 seconds) is selected when the value of the consecutive shots counter 181 is equal to or higher than the second reference value. If so, the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected. Further, as the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode, the first ending period (6 seconds) is selected if the value of the consecutive shots counter 181 is less than the second reference value, and the first ending period (6 seconds) is selected when the value of the consecutive shots counter 181 is equal to or higher than the second reference value. If so, the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected.

As described above, when the value of the consecutive game counter 181 becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, the final stop period of the game, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode become longer. . As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any gaming times in the low-frequency support mode, the opening/closing execution per unit time Modes occur less often. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Although the configuration is such that the value of the consecutive winnings counter 181 of the main side RAM 64 is added when the opening/closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode is started, it is not limited to this, and the opening/closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode is A configuration may be adopted in which the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is incremented when the game round that triggers the transition to the execution mode ends.

Alternatively, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 may be added during the game round that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode and before the final stop period of the game round starts. . As a result, it is possible to start early the firing cycle of game balls according to the value of the consecutive game counter 181, the final stop period of the game round, and the lengthening of the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode. becomes.

Alternatively, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 may be incremented when the game round that triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode is started. As a result, the firing period of the game ball according to the value of the consecutive game counter 181, the continuous period of fluctuation of the game time, the final stop period of the game time, and the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are extended. This makes it possible to start early.

Alternatively, the value of the consecutive winnings counter 181 may be incremented during the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode and after the opening period starts or when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, the opening/closing execution mode to be added to the consecutive winnings counter 181 is not limited to the opening/closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode, and the opening/closing execution mode by either the low-frequency winning mode or the high-frequency winning mode is continuous. It may also be configured to be added to the counter 181.

Furthermore, all of the opening/closing execution modes in the high-frequency winning mode are not limited to the configuration in which additions are made to the consecutive winnings counter 181, and the opening/closing execution mode based on the maximum number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode is incremented to the consecutive winnings counter 181. 181, while other opening/closing execution modes may not be added to the consecutive shot counter 181. Further, an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R high probability jackpot result is subject to addition to the consecutive winnings counter 181, while other opening/closing execution modes are not subject to addition to the consecutive winnings counter 181.

<Fourth embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for lengthening the period of variation in game times according to the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 43(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base arrangement table 182.

The base arrangement table 182 is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. In the base array table 182, index information is set that is a serial number starting from the minimum value "0" and the maximum value is "n", and the fluctuation duration of the game round is set corresponding to each index information. . In the base array table 182, all the fluctuation durations of game times that can be acquired in a situation where the period adjustment process (step S616) is not executed in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14) are set, and index information of large values is set. The longer the fluctuation duration of the game play is associated with the longer period of time. In FIG. 43(a), index information of "0" is associated with a fluctuation duration of 2 seconds, and index information of "1" is associated with a fluctuation duration of 3 seconds. A fluctuation duration of 15 seconds is associated with the index information of "k", a fluctuation duration of 9 minutes is associated with the index information of "n-1", and a fluctuation duration of 9 minutes is associated with the index information of "n-1". ” is associated with a fluctuation duration period of 10 minutes.

When the longest period is selected as the fluctuation duration of a game time in step S604 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14), the index information of "n" in the base array table 182 is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. Ru. In addition, when the period acquisition process is executed in step S614 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 14), the index information corresponding to the read various period tables and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is mainly used. It is stored in the register of the side MPU 62. The main MPU 62 verifies the index information stored in the register against the base arrangement table 182 to ascertain the duration of fluctuations in the game times. Further, this stored index information is set as data corresponding to the fluctuation duration period in the fluctuation command. The same table as the base arrangement table 182 stored in the main side ROM 63 is stored in advance in the sound-light side ROM 83, and the sound-light side MPU 82 is set as a variation command by referring to the table. Understand the period of fluctuation in gaming times corresponding to index information.

FIG. 43(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the additional arrangement table 183.

The additional array table 183 is stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. The additional array table 183 is set with index information that is a sequential number starting from the minimum value "0" and has a maximum value "n". The number of index information and the numerical values that can be taken as the index information are the same as those in the base array table 182.

In the additional arrangement table 183, an additional period is set in correspondence with each index information to extend the period of variation of the game times. When the period adjustment process (step S616) in the process of acquiring the fluctuation duration (FIG. 14) extends the fluctuation duration of the gaming session, the period adjustment process (step S616) is performed before the period adjustment process (step S616) is executed. The additional period set in the additional arrangement table 183 in association with the index information corresponding to the variable continuation period of the game session is added to the obtained variation continuation period of the game session.

As shown in FIG. 43(b), the additional period set in the additional arrangement table 183 is not constant, but differs depending on the index information. Specifically, a longer additional period is set for index information included in a predetermined numerical range that is larger compared to the small numerical range than for index information included in a small numerical range following the minimum value. . In other words, the fluctuation duration of gaming times included in a predetermined period range that is long compared to the short period range is longer than the fluctuation duration of gaming times included in a short period range following the shortest period. is set. However, for index information that exceeds a predetermined value, 0 seconds is set as the additional period, and no additional period is substantially set. As a result, an extension of the period does not occur for a long fluctuation continuation period of a game that is longer than a predetermined period. Specifically, regarding the additional period set in the additional array table 183, an additional period of 1 second is associated with index information of "0" and index information of "1", and an additional period of 1 second is associated with index information of "0" and index information of "1". An additional period of 4 seconds is associated with the information, and an additional period of 0 seconds is associated with the index information of "n-1" and the index information of "n."

If the condition for extending the fluctuating duration of a game session is satisfied in the period adjustment process (step S616) of the fluctuating duration acquisition process (FIG. 14), the game acquired before the period adjustment process (step S616) is executed. By comparing the index information corresponding to the continuous period of variation with respect to the additional arrangement table 183, the additional period corresponding to the index information can be grasped. Then, by adding the grasped additional period to the variable continuation period of the game round in a manner according to the extension condition, the main side MPU 62 grasps the variable continuation period of the current game round. Further, when the additional period is acquired by the main side MPU 62, an extension command in which the additional period is set is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82. The sound-light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the variation duration of the game session grasped based on the variation command, thereby determining the actual variation duration of the current game session. Understand. Furthermore, when an additional period that is not 0 seconds is found based on the contents of the extension command, the contents of the data table for game round effects are corrected in accordance with the extension of the variable continuation period of the game round. The modification of the contents in the data table for the game round performance is performed for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the period adjustment process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62. Note that the period adjustment process is executed in step S616 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process (FIG. 14).

If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value (step S2801: YES), the additional array table 183 is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S2802). After that, by comparing the index information corresponding to the fluctuation duration of the game times stored in the register of the main MPU 62 before the current period adjustment process (FIG. 44) against the additional array table 183, the current addition The period is grasped (step S2803). Then, based on the base array table 182 of the main side ROM 63, the fluctuation duration of the game session corresponding to the above index information is read out, and the additional period grasped in step S2803 is added to the read fluctuation duration of the gaming session. By doing so, the fluctuation duration of the current game round is grasped (step S2804). In this case, if the additional period is longer than 0 seconds, the fluctuating duration of the game time is extended, and if the additional period is 0 seconds, the fluctuating duration of the game time is not extended.

Then, an extension command in which the additional period grasped in step S2803 is set is sent to the sound/light side MPU 82 (step S2805). The sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and by adding the grasped additional period to the variable duration of the game round grasped based on the variable command, grasps the actual variable duration of the current game round. Furthermore, if an additional period other than 0 seconds is grasped based on the contents of the extension command, the contents of the data table for game round presentation are modified to correspond to the extension of the variable duration of the game round. This modification of the contents of the data table for game round presentation is performed for the high-speed variable display period of all pattern columns Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment.

If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value but less than the third reference value (step S2806: YES), the additional array table 183 is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S2807). Thereafter, by comparing the index information corresponding to the fluctuating duration of the game times stored in the register of the main MPU 62 before the current period adjustment process (FIG. 44) against the additional array table 183, the current additional period can be adjusted. (Step S2808), and further doubles the determined additional period (Step S2809). Then, based on the base array table 182 of the main side ROM 63, the fluctuation duration of the gaming session corresponding to the above index information is read out, and the additional period calculated in step S2809 is added to the fluctuation duration of the gaming session that has been read out. By adding , the fluctuation duration of the current game round is grasped (step S2810). In this case, if the additional period ascertained in step S2808 is longer than 0 seconds, the duration of fluctuation in game times is extended by twice the additional period, and if the additional period is 0 seconds, In this case, the duration of fluctuation in game times will not be extended.

Thereafter, an extension command in which the additional period calculated in step S2809 is set is transmitted to the audio-light side MPU 82 (step S2811). The sound-light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the variation continuation period of the game session grasped based on the variation command, thereby determining the actual variation continuation of the current game session. Understand the time period. Furthermore, when an additional period that is not 0 seconds is found based on the contents of the extension command, the contents of the data table for game round effects are corrected in accordance with the extension of the variable continuation period of the game round. The modification of the contents in the data table for the game round performance is performed for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment.

If the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2812: YES), the additional array table 183 is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S2813). After that, by comparing the index information corresponding to the fluctuating duration of the game times stored in the register of the main MPU 62 before the current period adjustment process (FIG. 44) against the additional array table 183, the current additional period can be adjusted. (step S2814), and further multiplies the determined additional period by three (step S2815). Then, based on the base array table 182 of the main side ROM 63, the fluctuation duration of the gaming session corresponding to the above-mentioned index information is read out, and the additional period calculated in step S2815 is added to the fluctuation duration of the gaming session that has been read out. By adding , the fluctuation duration of the current game round is grasped (step S2816). In this case, if the additional period ascertained in step S2814 is longer than 0 seconds, the period of variation in game times is extended by three times the additional period, and if the additional period is 0 seconds. In this case, the duration of fluctuation in game times will not be extended.

Thereafter, an extension command in which the additional period calculated in step S2815 is set is transmitted to the audio-light side MPU 82 (step S2817). The sound-light side MPU 82 grasps the additional period based on the extension command, and adds the grasped additional period to the variation continuation period of the game session grasped based on the variation command, thereby determining the actual variation continuation of the current game session. Understand the time period. Furthermore, when an additional period that is not 0 seconds is found based on the contents of the extension command, the contents of the data table for game round effects are corrected in accordance with the extension of the variable continuation period of the game round. The modification of the contents in the data table for the game round performance is performed for the high-speed fluctuation display period of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as in the first embodiment.

According to the above configuration, if the extension condition for the continuation period of fluctuation in game times is satisfied based on the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the fluctuation in game times obtained before the period adjustment process (FIG. 44) is executed. An additional period corresponding to the duration period is acquired, and the acquired additional period is added to the fluctuating duration period of the game session acquired before the execution of the period adjustment process (Fig. 44), so that the current game The duration of fluctuations in times can be grasped. As a result, it becomes possible to extend the period by a length corresponding to the fluctuating duration of the game rounds that is subject to extension, and it becomes possible to appropriately extend the fluctuating duration of the gaming rounds.

When increasing the degree of extension of the fluctuation duration of the game times executed in the high-frequency support mode in response to the increase in the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c of the main side RAM 64, the The additional period is multiplied by multiple times by multiplying the additional period by a multiplier of 2 or more according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, and the multiplied additional period is used before executing the period adjustment process (FIG. 44). This is a configuration in which the amount is added to the fluctuation duration of the acquired gaming times. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the degree of extension of the fluctuation continuation period of the game round by using the one additional arrangement table 183.

It should be noted that the configuration for extending the variation duration of the game times as in the present embodiment is modified by a parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time as in the second embodiment. The configuration is the target ball payout rate, or the parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time as in the third embodiment above is the number of executions of the opening/closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode. It may be applied to a configuration.

When applied to the second embodiment, in step S2801 in the period adjustment process (FIG. 44), the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is set to the first reference value (“134%”). It is determined whether or not the above is less than the second reference value (“200%”), and in step S2806, the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is the second reference value (“200%”). %") and less than a third reference value ("300%"), and in step S2812, the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is set to the third reference value. ("300%") or more is determined.

When applied to the third embodiment, in step S2801 in the period adjustment process (FIG. 44), the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is equal to or greater than the first reference value ("2"), and the second reference value (" In step S2806, it is determined whether the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is greater than or equal to the second reference value ("4") and less than the third reference value ("6"). In step S2812, it is determined whether the value of the consecutive games counter 181 is equal to or greater than a third reference value ("6").

<Fifth embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for lengthening the period of variation in game times according to the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIGS. 45(a) to 45(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first to fourth base array tables 185 to 188.

The first to fourth base arrangement tables 185 to 188 are all stored in the main ROM 63 in advance. The first to fourth base array tables 185 to 188 are all set with index information that is a sequential number starting from the minimum value "0" and has a maximum value of "n", and the game is played in correspondence with each index information. The duration of the fluctuation is set.

The first base array table 185 shown in FIG. 45(a) is referred to when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is less than the first reference value. In the first base array table 185, all the variable duration periods of game rounds that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is less than the first reference value are set, and index information of large values is set. The longer the fluctuation duration of the game play is associated with the longer period. In the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process in step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read out according to the game content and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is sent to the main MPU 62. is stored in the register. If the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the first reference value, the main MPU 62 checks the fluctuation duration of the game by comparing the index information stored in the register against the first base array table 185. Understand. Then, a variation command in which information about the grasped variation duration of the gaming session is set is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the variation duration of the current game round based on the variation command.

The second base array table 186 shown in FIG. 45(b) is referred to when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. In the second base array table 186, all the variable duration periods of game times that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the first reference value but less than the second reference value are set. The index information having a larger value is associated with a longer period of fluctuation duration of gaming times. In the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process in step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read out according to the game content and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is sent to the main MPU 62. is stored in the register. If the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is greater than or equal to the first reference value but less than the second reference value, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the second base array table 186. This allows us to understand the duration of fluctuations in gaming times. Then, a variation command in which information about the grasped variation duration of the gaming session is set is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The third base array table 187 shown in FIG. 45(c) is referred to when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value. In the third base array table 187, all the variable duration periods of game times that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value are set. The index information having a larger value is associated with a longer period of fluctuation duration of gaming times. In the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process in step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read out according to the game content and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is sent to the main MPU 62. is stored in the register. If the value of the total round number counter 64c is greater than or equal to the second reference value but less than the third reference value, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the third base array table 187. This allows us to understand the duration of fluctuations in gaming times. Then, a variation command in which information about the grasped variation duration of the gaming session is set is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The fourth base arrangement table 188 shown in FIG. 45(d) is referenced when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value. In the fourth base arrangement table 188, all of the variable durations of the number of play times that can be selected when the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value are set, and the larger the value of the index information, the longer the variable duration of the number of play times is associated with the variable duration. In the variable duration acquisition process of step S512 in the special chart variable start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read out according to the game content and the acquired variable type counter CS is stored in the register of the main MPU 62. When the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the third reference value, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the fourth base arrangement table 188 to grasp the variable duration of the number of play times. Then, a variable command in which the information of the variable duration of the number of play times that has been grasped is set is transmitted to the sound/light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 determines the duration of the fluctuation for the current game based on the fluctuation command.

When comparing the variation duration of game times set in each base arrangement table 185 to 188 using the same index information, the first base arrangement table 185 is the shortest, and the second base arrangement table 186 is the second shortest. , the third base array table 187 is the second longest, and the fourth base array table 188 is the longest. As a result, the larger the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main side RAM 64 becomes, the longer the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the selected game rounds becomes.

Further, when comparing the same index information, the increase in the variation duration of game times in each base arrangement table 185 to 188 becomes larger as the value of the index information becomes larger. As a result, when the longer period of the variation duration of game times in the first base arrangement table 185 is changed to the second base arrangement table 186, the third base arrangement table 187, and the fourth base arrangement table 188, It becomes possible to increase the amount of increase in the duration of fluctuation of the number of games played.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating a process for obtaining a fluctuation duration period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main side RAM 64 is less than the first reference value (step S2901: YES), the first base array table 185 is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S2902). If the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c in the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the first reference value but less than the second reference value (step S2903: YES), the second base array table 186 is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S2904). ). If the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the second reference value but less than the third reference value (step S2905: YES), the third base array table 187 is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S2906 ). When the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is equal to or greater than the third reference value (step S2905: NO), the fourth base array table 188 is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S2907).

When the process of step S2902, the process of step S2904, the process of step S2906, or the process of step S2907 is executed, a process for reading a period table according to the game content is executed (step S2908). In this process, if the current game round is a jackpot result or a small win result, the winning time period table is read out. Further, if the current game round is not a jackpot result or a small win result, the processing of steps S605 to S613 in the fluctuation continuation period acquisition processing (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, if the current game time is a jackpot result or a small win result, the winning time period table is read out, and if the current game time is a loss and corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display, the reach time period table is read out. The period table is read out, and if the current game round is in the high-frequency support mode and the number of pending storage information on the second special symbol side is less than 2, the regular period table is read out, If the current game round is in the high frequency support mode and the number of pending storage information on the second special symbol side is 2 or more, the shortening period table is read out, and the current game round is in the low frequency support mode. If it is support mode and the number of pending storage information on the first special symbol side is less than 3, the regular period table is read out, and if the current game is in low frequency support mode and the number is If the number of pending storage information on the special figure side is three or more, the shortening period table is read out.

In these period tables, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so that they do not overlap with each other, and the number of gaming times is set for each of these groups. The index information is set instead of the fluctuation duration information. The index information is set so that the selection mode of the variation duration of the gaming session based on each period table is the same as the selection mode of the variation duration of the gaming session based on the respective period table in the first embodiment. It is being said. Therefore, the average period of variation in game times that results in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result, a 5R high-probability jackpot result, or a 10R high-probability jackpot result is a variation in game times that results in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a small win result. This period is longer than the average duration of the duration and the average duration of the fluctuating duration of game times in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game round is longer for a game round that results in any of the 10R low-probability jackpot result, 5R high-probability jackpot result, and 10R high-probability jackpot result than for the game run in which the winning reach is displayed. Further, the average duration of fluctuations in the game rounds that result in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a small win result is longer than the average duration of fluctuations in the game rounds in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average period of fluctuation continuation of game times that result in an out-of-reach display is the average period of fluctuation continuation of game times that result in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a small win result, and the continued fluctuation period of game times in which a reach-to-reach display does not occur. The period is longer than the average period. Further, in a game game where a reach display does not occur, when the shortening period table is selected, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game game is shorter than when the normal period table is selected.

After executing the process of step S2908, index information acquisition process is executed (step S2909). In the index information acquisition process, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, index information is obtained by comparing the obtained numerical information of the variation type counter CS against the period table read out in step S2908.

Thereafter, period acquisition processing is executed (step S2910). In the period acquisition process, the index information acquired in step S2909 is checked against the base array tables 185 to 188 read out in any of steps S2902, S2904, S2906, and S2907 to obtain the current Obtain the duration of fluctuation in game times. This acquired information on the variation continuation period of the game round is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in step S513 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13). As a result, measurement of the duration of fluctuation in game times is started. In other words, in this embodiment, since the fluctuating duration of the game times is acquired using the base array tables 185 to 188 according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the period for extending the fluctuating duration of the gaming times is Adjustment processing (FIG. 24) is not executed.

After that, the variation command including the information on the variation duration of the game times acquired in step S2910 and the type command including the current validity determination result and distribution determination result are transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S2911). . The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the variation duration of the gaming session based on the information set in the received variation command, and controls the execution of the performance according to the grasped variation duration of the gaming session. That is, in this embodiment, the process of extending the variation continuation period (step S1706) is not executed in the sound and light side MPU 82, and the process of correcting the data table for game round performance (step S1707) is not executed.

According to the above configuration, since the fluctuating duration of the game times is obtained using the base array tables 185 to 188 according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, the period can be adjusted to extend the fluctuating duration of the gaming times. The process (FIG. 24) is not executed. Then, since the extension of the variation duration of the game cycle is not executed, the process of extending the variation duration (step S1706) is not executed in the sound-light side MPU 82, and furthermore, the process of correcting the data table for the game cycle performance is not executed. (Step S1707) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the number of games fluctuates in accordance with the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c while reducing the processing load.

Index information is set in each period table read according to the game content in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, and the index information is acquired based on the period table and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. . Then, depending on which table among the first to fourth base array tables 185 to 188 the index information is checked against, the fluctuation duration of the acquired game times changes even if the index information is the same. It is the composition. This makes it possible to obtain the fluctuating continuation period of the game play according to the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c while using a common period table. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the number of games fluctuates depending on the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity.

It should be noted that the configuration for changing the variation duration of game times as in the present embodiment is modified by a parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time as in the second embodiment. The configuration is the target ball payout rate, or as in the third embodiment above, the parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is the number of executions of the opening/closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode. It may be applied to a configuration.

When applied to the second embodiment, in step S2901 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 46), the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is set to the first reference value (“134 %), and in step S2903, it is determined whether the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the first reference value (``134%'') and the second reference value. (“200%”), and in step S905, the target ball payout rate stored in the target ball payout rate area 173 is equal to or higher than the second reference value (“200%”). It is determined whether or not it is less than 3 reference values ("300%").

When applied to the third embodiment, in step S2901 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is less than the first reference value (“2”). In step S2903, it is determined whether the value of the consecutive game counter 181 is greater than or equal to the first reference value (“2”) and less than the second reference value (“4”), and in step S905, it is determined whether the value of the consecutive game counter 181 It is determined whether the value of the counter 181 is greater than or equal to the second reference value ("4") and less than the third reference value ("6").

<Sixth embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for reducing the number of gaming rounds in the high frequency support mode according to the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating a process for obtaining a fluctuation duration period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

If the current success/failure determination result is a jackpot result or a small win result (step S3001: YES), the winning time period table is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S3002). The contents of the winning time period table are the same as in the first embodiment.

If the current success/failure determination result is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether or not an out-of-reach display occurs in the current game round (step S3003). If the out-of-reach display occurs in this game round (step S3003: YES), the reach-to-reach period table is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3004). The contents of the ready-to-reach period table are the same as in the first embodiment.

If the out-of-reach display does not occur in this game round (step S3003: NO), the current support is determined by determining whether the high-frequency support flag provided in the main side RAM 64 is set to "1" It is determined whether the mode is high frequency support mode (step S3005). If the mode is high-frequency support mode (step S3005: YES), it is determined whether the number of pieces of pending information on the second special figure side stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is 3 or more ( Step S3006). In the high-frequency support mode, as already explained, the frequency with which the utility power accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 becomes open per unit time is relatively high, so the hold information on the second special map side is acquired. It becomes easier. Further, as already explained, the reservation information on the second special figure side is given priority over the reservation information on the first special figure side as a starting target for the game round. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the suspension information on the second special symbol side is configured to change the period table that is referred to in order to determine the fluctuating period of the game play according to the number of suspended and stored pieces. .

If the number of pending storage information on the second special symbol side is less than 2 (step S3006: NO), the normal period table 191 (see FIG. 48(a)) is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S3007). If the number of pending storage information on the second special drawing side is two or more (step S3006: YES), the value of the total round number counter 64c of the main side RAM 64 is the second reference value (“30”) It is determined whether or not it is the above (step S3008). When the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value (step S3008: YES), the normal period table 191 is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S3007). If the value of the total round number counter 64c is less than the second reference value (step S3008: NO), the shortening period table 192 (see FIG. 48(b)) is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3009).

FIG. 48(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal period table 191. As shown in FIG. 48(a), a plurality of groups are set in the normal period table 191 by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so that they do not overlap with each other. , information on the duration of variation in game times is set for each of these groups. In other words, in the regular period table 191, multiple types are set so that the period of fluctuation of the game play without a winning result and no reach display occurs is relatively long or short, and fluctuations from "0 to 198" are set. Each of the type counters CS is assigned to one of the plurality of types of variation duration periods.

FIG. 48(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the shortening period table 192. As shown in FIG. 48(b), a plurality of groups are set in the shortening period table 192 by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so that they do not overlap with each other. , information on the duration of fluctuation in game times is set for each of these groups. In other words, in the shortening period table 192, a plurality of types are set so that the period of fluctuation of the number of games without a winning result and a reach display does not occur is relatively long or short, and fluctuations from "0 to 198" are set. Each of the type counters CS is assigned to one of the plurality of types of variation duration periods.

In the shortening period table 192, a fluctuation continuation period shorter than the fluctuation continuation period set in other period tables including the normal period table 191 is set. Therefore, if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the second reference value, there will be no winning result in a situation where two or more pieces of pending information on the second special symbol side are held and stored in the high frequency support mode, and the reach will be even higher. When a game round in which no display occurs is started, the fluctuation duration of the game round may be shorter than in other situations. Further, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times according to the shortening period table 192 is shorter than the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times according to other period tables including the regular period table 191. Therefore, if the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is less than the second reference value, there will be no winning result in a situation where two or more pieces of pending information on the second special symbol side are held and stored in the high frequency support mode, and the reach will be even higher. When a game round in which no display occurs is started, the average duration of the fluctuation duration of the game round is shorter than in other situations.

If it is the low frequency support mode (step S3005: NO), it is determined whether the number of pieces of reservation information on the first special figure side stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is 3 or more ( Step S3010). In the low-frequency support mode, as already explained, the frequency with which the utility power tool 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively low, so the hold information on the second special map side is not acquired. This makes it easier to acquire the reservation information on the first special figure side than the reservation information on the second special figure side. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the suspension information on the first special symbol side is configured to change the period table that is referred to in order to determine the fluctuating duration of the game play according to the number of suspended and stored pieces. .

If the number of pending storage information on the first special figure side is less than three (step S3010: NO), the normal period table 191 is read from the main side ROM 63 (step S3011), and the first special figure side If the number of pending storage information is three or more (step S3010: YES), the shortening period table 192 is read from the main ROM 63 (step S3012). The contents of the normal period table and the shortened period table are as described above.

If the winning time period table is read out in step S3002, if the reach time period table is read out in step S3004, if the normal time period table 191 is read out in step S3007, the shortening period table is read out in step S3009. 192, the normal period table 191 is read in step S3011, or the shortened period table 192 is read in step S3012, period acquisition processing is executed (step S3013). In the period acquisition process, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, by comparing the acquired numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS against the period tables 191 and 192 read out as described above, the fluctuation continuation period of the current game round is obtained. This acquired information on the variation continuation period of the game round is set in the special figure special electric timer counter in step S513 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 13). As a result, measurement of the duration of fluctuation in game times is started. In other words, in this embodiment, since the fluctuating duration of gaming times obtained using each period table 191, 192 is used as is, the period adjustment process for extending the fluctuating duration of gaming times (FIG. 24) is not executed.

Thereafter, a variation command including information on the variation duration of the game round acquired this time, and a type command including the current validity determination result and distribution determination result are transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S3014). The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the variation duration of the gaming session based on the information set in the received variation command, and controls the execution of the performance according to the grasped variation duration of the gaming session. That is, in this embodiment, the process of extending the variation duration (step S1706) is not executed in the sound and light side MPU 82, and the process of correcting the data table for game round performance (step S1707) is not executed.

According to the above configuration, even if the number of pending storage information on the second special symbol side is two or more in the high frequency support mode, as long as the value of the total round number counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value. , instead of the shortened period table 192, the game cycle is determined by referring to the regular period table 191, as in the case where the number of pending storage information on the second special symbol side is less than 2 in the high-frequency support mode. The variation duration of is obtained. More specifically, the validity period table 191 is a period table that is referred to when the number of pending storage information on the first special symbol side is less than three in the low frequency support mode. As a result, if the opening/closing execution mode that becomes the high-frequency winning mode repeatedly occurs in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without the occurrence of a game in the low-frequency support mode, the Even if the number of pending storage information on the 2nd special figure side is 2 or more, the fluctuation continuation period of the game round is not shortened. Then, since the fluctuation duration of the game times is not shortened, the number of times the game times occur per unit time decreases, and as a result, the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time becomes low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the high-frequency support mode, the period table selected in the situation where the number of pending information on the second special drawing side is 2 or more stored is changed to the existing normal period table 191 and the shortening period. Since the configuration is configured to switch between the table 192 and the table 192, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while reducing the processing load and suppressing an increase in storage capacity.

It should be noted that the configuration for changing the fluctuation duration of the game times as in the present embodiment is modified by a parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time as in the second embodiment. The configuration is the target ball payout rate, or the parameter for creating an opportunity to regulate the number of occurrences of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time as in the third embodiment above is the number of executions of the opening/closing execution mode by the high-frequency winning mode. It may be applied to a configuration. When applied to the second embodiment, in step S3008 in the fluctuation duration acquisition process (FIG. 47), the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 is set to the second reference value (“200 %") or more is determined. When applied to the third embodiment, in step S3008 in the fluctuating duration acquisition process (FIG. 47), the value of the consecutive winnings counter 181 is equal to or higher than the second reference value (“4”) and the third criterion is set. It is determined whether the value is less than the value (“6”).

Further, in step S3008, instead of determining whether the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c is equal to or greater than the second reference value, it may be configured to determine whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the first reference value. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is equal to or greater than a reference value, or it may be configured to determine whether or not it is equal to or greater than another reference value different from the first to third reference values.

<Seventh embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIGS. 49(a) to 49(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first to third base array tables 195 to 197.

All of the first to third base arrangement tables 195 to 197 are stored in the main side ROM 63 in advance. In each of the first to third base array tables 195 to 197, index information is set that is a consecutive number starting from the minimum value "0" and the maximum value is "n", and the game is played in correspondence with each index information. The duration of the fluctuation is set.

The first base arrangement table 195 shown in FIG. 49(a) is based on the occurrence of a 5R high-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, and then the low-frequency support mode. This is referred to when the situation is a non-regulated situation where the high-frequency support mode continues without any game play occurring. In the first base array table 195, all the variable continuation periods of game times that can be selected in a non-regulated situation are set, and index information with a larger value is associated with a longer variable continuation period of game times. In the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process in step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read out according to the game content and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is sent to the main MPU 62. is stored in the register. If the situation is non-regulated, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the first base array table 195 to ascertain the period of variation in the number of games played. Then, a variation command in which information about the grasped variation duration of the gaming session is set is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The second base arrangement table 196 shown in FIG. 49(b) is based on the occurrence of a 5R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, and then the high-frequency support mode occurs, followed by a game round in the low-frequency support mode. Reference is made when the first regulation situation is in which the high-frequency support mode continues without interruption. In the second base array table 196, all the fluctuation durations of gaming times that can be selected in the first regulation situation are set, and index information with a larger value is associated with a longer fluctuation duration of gaming times. . In the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process in step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read out according to the gaming state and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is sent to the main MPU 62. is stored in the register. In the case of the first regulation situation, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the second base array table 196 to ascertain the fluctuation duration of the game. Then, a variation command in which information about the grasped variation duration of the gaming session is set is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

The third base arrangement table 197 shown in FIG. 49(c) shows that based on the occurrence of a 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode occurs, and then a game round in the low-frequency support mode occurs. This is referred to when the second restriction situation is in which the high-frequency support mode continues without any interruption. In the third base array table 197, all the fluctuation durations of gaming times that can be selected in the case of the second regulation situation are set, and the larger the index information, the longer the fluctuation duration of the gaming times is associated. It is being In the fluctuation continuation period acquisition process of step S512 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 13), the index information corresponding to the various period tables read out according to the gaming state and the acquired fluctuation type counter CS is sent to the main MPU 62. is stored in the register. In the case of the second regulation situation, the main MPU 62 checks the index information stored in the register against the third base array table 197 to ascertain the duration of fluctuation of the game. Then, a variation command in which information about the grasped variation duration of the gaming session is set is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82. The sound/light side MPU 82 grasps the fluctuation duration of the current game round based on the fluctuation command.

When comparing the variation duration of game times set in each base arrangement table 195 to 197 using the same index information, the first base arrangement table 195 is the shortest, and the second base arrangement table 196 is the second shortest. , the third base array table 197 is the longest. As a result, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the selected game times becomes longer in the order of non-restricted situation → first restricted situation → second restricted situation.

Further, when comparing the same index information, the increase in the variation duration of the game times in each base arrangement table 195 to 197 becomes larger as the value of the index information becomes larger. As a result, the longer period of the fluctuation duration of the game times in the first base arrangement table 195 is the longer period of the fluctuation duration of the game times when changed to the second base arrangement table 196 and the third base arrangement table 197. It becomes possible to increase the amount of increase.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing special call termination processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by checking whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter in the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3101). If a negative determination is made in step S3101, this special call termination process is directly terminated.

If the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3101: YES), a game state transition process is executed (step S3102). The contents of the game state transition process are the same as step S1202 of the special call end process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

After that, it is determined whether the support mode before the current opening/closing execution mode started was the low-frequency support mode, and the support mode after the current opening/closing execution mode ended was the high-frequency support mode (step S3103). A pre-start support flag is provided in the main side RAM 64, and if the support mode immediately before the opening/closing execution mode is started is the low-frequency support mode, the pre-starting support flag is cleared to "0" and the opening/closing execution mode is started. If the support mode immediately before the start is the high-frequency support mode, "1" is set in the pre-start support flag. In step S3103, an affirmative determination is made if the pre-start support flag is "0" and the high-frequency support flag is "1".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3103, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 5R high certainty jackpot result (step S3104). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, information corresponding to the second cycle that enables the launch of 90 game balls per minute is set in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S3105). The second period is approximately 0.67 seconds, which is the second shortest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the second period in the firing period area 64b, in the firing control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the firing control section 78c, the second period is set in the firing period area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period passes, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game balls to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

Thereafter, the second base array table 196 is read from the main side ROM 63 to the main side RAM 64 (step S3106). As a result, the second base array table 196 will be referred to when the fluctuating duration period of a game round is acquired.

If a negative determination is made in step S3104, it is determined whether or not the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 10R high probability jackpot result (step S3107). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3107, information corresponding to the third cycle that allows firing of 80 game balls per minute is set in the firing cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S3108). The third period is the longest firing period, 0.75 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the third period in the firing period area 64b, in the firing control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the firing control section 78c, the third period is set in the firing period area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the third period passes, and the game ball is stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game ball to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the amount of rotation is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the third period passes.

Thereafter, the third base array table 197 is read from the main side ROM 63 to the main side RAM 64 (step S3109). As a result, the third base array table 197 will be referred to when the variable duration period of a game round is acquired.

If a negative determination is made in step S3103, if the process in step S3106 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S3107, or if the process in step S3109 is executed, the special figure special electric line counter is cleared to "0" ( Step S3110). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric line end process to the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the special figure confirmation process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by checking whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter in the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S3201). If a negative determination is made in step S3201, the present special symbol determining process is directly ended.

If the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S3201: YES), the condition is that the validity determination result that triggered the current game round is a jackpot result or a small win result (step S3202: YES), execute processing for transitioning to opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, first, an opening period acquisition process is executed (step S3203). In this embodiment, there is one type of opening period, and specifically, it is set to 4 seconds.

Thereafter, the information on the opening period acquired in step S3203 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S3204). Thereby, measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

After that, an opening command is transmitted to the audio-light side MPU 82 (step S3205). Upon receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period and causes the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 to execute the opening effect. Further, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is caused to perform an opening effect.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electric counter (step S3206). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the value corresponding to the special electric line starting process.

On the other hand, if the judgment result that triggered the current game round is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result (step S3202: NO), the high probability flag in the main side RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support is By determining whether the flag is "1" or not, it is possible to determine whether the game is in a low-probability mode with a high frequency after the opening/closing execution mode, which was triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result in the game round that ended this time. It is determined whether the game is played in a situation where the support mode is present (step S3207).

If it is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S3207: YES), the value of the number of games counter in the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S3208). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the game count of the end standard number of times is executed in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (step S3209). If the value of the number of games counter is "0" (step S3209: YES), the high frequency support flag in the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3210). This results in a situation where the mode is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

Then, information corresponding to the first period that allows 100 game balls to be launched per minute is set in the launch period area 64b of the main RAM 64 (step S3211). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest launch period. By setting information corresponding to the first period in the launch period area 64b, if the launch control process (FIG. 11) continues to receive a condition establishment signal from the launch control unit 78c, a launch instruction signal is sent to the launch control unit 78c every time the first period elapses. As a result, the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period elapses, and if game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 29b is such that the game balls reach the game area PA, game balls are supplied to the game area PA every time the first period elapses.

Thereafter, the first base array table 195 is read from the main side ROM 63 to the main side RAM 64 (step S3212). As a result, the first base arrangement table 195 will be referred to when the fluctuating duration period of a game round is acquired.

When a negative determination is made in step S3207, when a negative determination is made in step S3209, or when the process of step S3212 is executed, the special figure special electric line counter is cleared to "0" (step S3213). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

The first regulation situation occurs when the high-frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of a 5R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode. In the first regulation situation, as mentioned above, the firing cycle of the game ball is the second shortest cycle, and when determining the continuous period of fluctuation of the game time, the average period of the continuous period of fluctuation of the game time is the second longest. Second base array table 196 is referenced. Then, this first restricted situation is terminated and becomes a non-restricted situation when a game round can be executed in the low frequency support mode. In a non-regulated situation, as mentioned above, the first cycle is the shortest firing cycle of game balls, and when determining the continuous period of variation in game times, the first base array table with the shortest average period of the continuous fluctuation period of game times is used. 195 is referred to.

The second regulation situation occurs when the high frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of a 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low frequency support mode. In the second regulation situation, as mentioned above, the third cycle has the longest firing cycle of game balls, and when determining the fluctuation duration of the game cycle, the third base arrangement has the longest average duration of the fluctuation duration of the game cycle. Table 197 is referenced. Then, this second restricted situation is terminated and becomes a non-restricted situation when a game round can be executed in the low frequency support mode. In a non-regulated situation, as mentioned above, the first cycle is the shortest firing cycle of game balls, and when determining the fluctuation duration of the game cycle, the first base array table with the shortest average duration of the fluctuation duration of the game cycle is used. 195 is referred to.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating a process for acquiring a fluctuation duration period in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 62.

First, a process for reading a period table corresponding to the game content is executed (step S3301). In this process, if the current game round is a jackpot result or a small win result, the winning time period table is read out. Further, if the current game round is not a jackpot result or a small win result, the processing of steps S605 to S613 in the fluctuating duration acquisition processing (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is executed. As a result, if the current game time is a jackpot result or a small win result, the winning time period table is read out, and if the current game time is a loss and corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display, the reach time period table is read out. The period table is read out, and if the current game round is in the high-frequency support mode and the number of pending storage information on the second special symbol side is less than 2, the regular period table is read out, If the current gaming session is in the high-frequency support mode and the number of pending storage information on the second special symbol side is 2 or more, the shortening period table is read out, and the current gaming session is in the low-frequency support mode. If it is support mode and the number of pending storage information on the first special symbol side is less than 3, the regular period table is read out, and if the current game is in low frequency support mode and the number of pending storage information is less than 3, If the number of pending storage information on the special figure side is three or more, the shortening period table is read out.

In these period tables, multiple groups are set by dividing the numerical range of "0 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS so that they do not overlap with each other, and game times are set for each of these groups. Index information is set instead of information on the period of fluctuation. The index information is set so that the selection mode of the variation duration of the gaming session based on each period table is the same as the selection mode of the variation duration of the gaming session based on the respective period table in the first embodiment. It is being said. Therefore, the average period of fluctuations in game rounds that result in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result, a 5R high-probability jackpot result, or a 10R high-probability jackpot result is a variation in game cycles that results in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a small win result. This period is longer than the average duration of the duration and the average duration of the fluctuating duration of game times in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times is longer in the game times in which any of the 10R low-probability jackpot results, the 5R high-probability jackpot results, and the 10R high-probability jackpot results occur than in the game times with the out-of-reach display. Furthermore, the average duration of fluctuations in the game rounds that result in either a 2R high-probability jackpot result or a small win result is longer than the average duration of fluctuations in the game rounds in which the reach display does not occur. In addition, the average period of fluctuation continuation of the game times in which the out-of-reach display occurs is the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times in which the 2R high-probability jackpot result or small win result occurs, and the fluctuation continuation of the fluctuation period in the game times in which the reach-to-reach display does not occur. The period is longer than the average period. Furthermore, in a game game where a reach display does not occur, when the shortening period table is selected, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game game is shorter than when the normal period table is selected.

After executing the process of step S3301, index information acquisition process is executed (step S3302). In the index information acquisition process, numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Then, index information is obtained by comparing the obtained numerical information of the variation type counter CS against the period table read out in step S3301.

Thereafter, period acquisition processing is executed (step S3303). In the period acquisition process, the index information acquired in step S3302 is checked against the base array tables 195 to 197 currently read out in the main side RAM 64, thereby acquiring the fluctuation duration of the current game round. do. Specifically, if the situation is non-regulated, the index information acquired in step S3302 is checked against the first base array table 195 read out to the main side RAM 64. If it is the first regulation situation, the index information acquired in step S3302 is compared against the second base array table 196 read out to the main side RAM 64. If it is the second regulation situation, the index information acquired in step S3302 is checked against the third base array table 197 read out to the main side RAM 64.

The information on the fluctuation continuation period of the game time acquired in step S3303 is set in the special symbol special electric timer counter in step S513 in the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 13). As a result, measurement of the duration of fluctuation in game times is started. That is, in this embodiment, the base arrangement tables 195 to 197 are used to obtain the fluctuating continuation period of a gaming session, so the period adjustment process (FIG. 24) for extending the fluctuating continuation period of a gaming session is not executed.

After that, the variation command including the information on the variation duration of the game times acquired in step S3303 and the type command including the current validity determination result and distribution determination result are transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 82 (step S3304). . The sound and light side MPU 82 grasps the variation duration of the gaming session based on the information set in the received variation command, and controls the execution of the performance according to the grasped variation duration of the gaming session. That is, in this embodiment, the process of extending the variation continuation period (step S1706) is not executed in the sound and light side MPU 82, and the process of correcting the data table for game round performance (step S1707) is not executed.

Next, how to set each of the non-restricted situation, the first restricted situation, and the second restricted situation will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 53. 53(a) shows a period in which the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 5R high-probability jackpot result, and FIG. 53(b) shows a period in which the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a 10R high-probability jackpot result. (c) shows a period in which the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot result other than the 5R high-probability jackpot result and the 10R high-probability jackpot result, and FIG. 53(d) shows a period in the high-frequency support mode. 53(e) shows a period in a non-regulated situation, FIG. 53(f) shows a period in a first regulated situation, and FIG. 53(g) shows a period in a second regulated situation.

As shown in FIG. 53(e), at the timing t1 in the non-regulated situation, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low probability jackpot result is started as shown in FIG. 53(c), and at the timing t2, the opening/closing execution mode is started. ends. At the timing of t2, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53(d). In this case, the period immediately before the opening/closing execution mode starts is the low-frequency support mode, and the period after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode, but the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode is Since this is neither a 5R high-probability jackpot result nor a 10R high-probability jackpot result, the non-regulated situation is maintained as shown in FIG. 53(e). In addition, even if the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high-probability jackpot result or the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs in the situation of the high-frequency support mode, the first regulation situation or the second regulation The non-regulated status is maintained without any transition to status. Thereafter, at timing t3, the end standard number of games are completed in the high-frequency support mode, and the support mode changes to the low-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53(d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(e), at timing t4 in the non-regulated situation, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high probability jackpot result is started as shown in FIG. 53(a), and at timing t5, the opening/closing execution mode is started. Run mode ends. At the timing t5, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53(d). In this case, the period immediately before the opening/closing execution mode starts is the low-frequency support mode, and the period after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode, and the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode is Since this is a 5R high-probability jackpot result, the non-restricted situation is ended and the first restricted situation is started, as shown in FIGS. 53(e) and 53(f). Due to the first regulation situation, as mentioned above, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes the second shortest cycle, and when determining the continuous period of fluctuation of the game time, the average period of the continuous fluctuation period of the game time becomes the second shortest period. The long second base array table 196 is referred to.

After that, while the high-frequency support mode continues, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high-probability jackpot result is started at timing t6 as shown in FIG. 53(b), and at the timing of t7, the opening/closing execution mode is started. ends. Since the 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs in the high-frequency support mode, the first regulation situation is maintained. Here, in the first regulation situation, the second base arrangement table 196 is referred to when determining the fluctuation continuation period of the game even if the game is a game that results in a 10R high-probability jackpot.

In addition, during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, even if the previous support mode was the high-frequency support mode, it becomes the low-frequency support mode, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, it becomes the high-frequency support mode again. . The first regulation situation is that an opening/closing execution mode occurs triggered by a 10R low-probability jackpot result, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the end standard number of games is exhausted in the high-frequency support mode, resulting in a low-frequency support mode. It ends by moving to .

Next, a case where the second restriction situation occurs will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 53(e), at the timing t8 in the non-regulated situation, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R high probability jackpot result is started as shown in FIG. 53(b), and at the timing t9, the opening/closing execution mode is started. ends. At the timing of t9, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode as shown in FIG. 53(d). In this case, the period immediately before the opening/closing execution mode starts is the low-frequency support mode, and the period after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high-frequency support mode, and the jackpot result that triggered the opening/closing execution mode is Since this is a 10R high-probability jackpot result, the non-restricted situation is ended and the second restricted situation is started, as shown in FIGS. 53(e) and 53(g). By entering the second regulation situation, as mentioned above, the firing cycle of game balls becomes the third cycle, which is the longest, and when determining the continuous period of variation in game cycles, the third cycle has the longest average duration of the variation duration of gaming cycles. Base array table 197 is referenced.

Thereafter, in a situation where the high-frequency support mode continues, the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 5R high-probability jackpot result is started at timing t10 as shown in FIG. 53(a), and at the timing t11, the opening/closing execution mode is started. ends. Since the 5R high-probability jackpot result occurs in the high-frequency support mode, the second regulation situation is maintained. Here, in the second regulation situation, the third base arrangement table 197 is referred to when determining the fluctuation continuation period of the game even if the game is a game that results in a 5R high-probability jackpot.

In addition, during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, even if the previous support mode was the high-frequency support mode, it becomes the low-frequency support mode, and when the opening/closing execution mode ends, it becomes the high-frequency support mode again. . The second regulation situation is that an opening/closing execution mode occurs triggered by a 10R low-probability jackpot result, and furthermore, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the end standard number of games is exhausted in the high-frequency support mode, resulting in a low-frequency support mode. It ends by moving to .

According to the above configuration, the occurrence of the high-frequency support mode based on the occurrence of a 5R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode results in the first regulation situation, and the first regulation situation is set in the gaming cycle in the low-frequency support mode. Continue until the situation is such that it can be executed. In addition, based on the occurrence of a 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode occurs, resulting in a second restriction situation, and the second restriction situation can be played in the low-frequency support mode. Continue until the situation is met. In other words, if the type of jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period in which game rounds are executed in the high-frequency support mode is the type that is subject to regulation, the firing cycle of game balls will become longer and the game rounds will fluctuate. Regulatory situations occur where the average duration of duration is longer. The regulatory situation continues as long as the advantageous period continues, and is terminated when the advantageous period ends. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period, depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period.

The first regulation situation occurs when the high-frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of a 5R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support occurs based on the occurrence of a 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode. The occurrence of the mode results in a second regulation situation in which the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time is lower than in the first regulation situation. Thereby, the higher the advantage of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period, the lower the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Since the fluctuating duration of the gaming session is obtained using the base array tables 195 to 197 corresponding to each of the non-regulated situation, the first regulated status, and the second regulated status, it is possible to extend the varying duration of the gaming session. The period adjustment process (FIG. 24) is not executed. Then, since the extension of the variation duration of the game cycle is not executed, the process of extending the variation duration (step S1706) is not executed in the sound-light side MPU 82, and furthermore, the process of correcting the data table for the game cycle effect is not executed. (Step S1707) is not executed. This makes it possible to lengthen the average duration of the fluctuation duration of gaming times in the first regulation situation and the second regulation situation while reducing the processing load.

Index information is set in each period table read according to the game content in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS, and the index information is acquired based on the period table and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. . Then, depending on which table among the first to third base array tables 195 to 197 the index information is checked against, the fluctuation duration of the acquired game times changes even if the index information is the same. It is the composition. Thereby, while using a common period table, it is possible to obtain the fluctuating continuation period of game times according to each of the non-restricted situation, the first restricted situation, and the second restricted situation. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the period of variation in game times in the first regulation situation and the second regulation situation while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity.

In addition, at least one of the final stop period of the game, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is determined according to the non-regulation situation, the first regulation situation, and the second regulation situation. Different configurations may be used. For example, in a non-restricted situation, the first final stop period (0.5 seconds) is selected as the final stop period of a game round, and in the first restricted situation, the second final stop period (3 seconds) is selected as the final stop period of a game round. is selected, and if it is the second regulation situation, the third final stop period (5 seconds) may be selected as the final stop period of the game round. Furthermore, in the non-restricted situation, the first opening period (4 seconds) is selected as the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, and in the first restriction situation, the second opening period (10 seconds) is selected as the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode. , in the second regulation situation, the third opening period (16 seconds) may be selected as the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in a non-restricted situation, the first interval period (2 seconds) is selected as the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and in the first restricted situation, the second interval period (6 seconds) is selected as the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode. , the third interval period (10 seconds) may be selected as the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode in the second regulation situation. In addition, in a non-restricted situation, the first ending period (6 seconds) is selected as the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode, and in the first restriction situation, the second ending period (12 seconds) is selected as the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode. , in the second regulation situation, the third ending period (18 seconds) may be selected as the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode.

By entering the first regulation situation or the second regulation situation as described above, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode become longer. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period, depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the special figure confirmation process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by checking whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter in the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S3401). If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the present special symbol determining process is directly ended.

If the final stop period of the current game round has passed (step S3401: YES), the condition is that the judgment result that triggered the current game round is a jackpot result or a small win result (step S3402: YES), execute processing for transitioning to opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, first, an opening period acquisition process is executed (step S3403). In this embodiment, there is one type of opening period, and specifically, it is set to 4 seconds.

Thereafter, the information on the opening period acquired in step S3403 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S3404). Thereby, measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

After that, an opening command is transmitted to the audio-light side MPU 82 (step S3405). Upon receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period and causes the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 to execute the opening effect. Further, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is caused to perform an opening effect.

After that, on the condition that the winning result that triggered the current opening/closing execution mode is either the 5R high-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result (step S3406: YES), the firing cycle area of the main side RAM 64 is 64b is set with information corresponding to the second cycle that allows firing of 90 game balls per minute (step S3407). The second period is the longest firing period, approximately 0.67 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the launch cycle area 64b, in the launch control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the launch control unit 78c, the second cycle is set. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period passes, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game balls to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the amount of rotation is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S3406, or when the process in step S3407 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is incremented by 1 (step S3408). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the value corresponding to the special electric line starting process.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result that triggered the current game round is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result (step S3402: NO), the high probability flag in the main side RAM 64 is "0" and the high frequency support is By determining whether the flag is "1" or not, it is possible to determine whether the game is in a low-probability mode with a high frequency after the opening/closing execution mode, which was triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result in the game round that ended this time. It is determined whether the game is played in a situation where the support mode is present (step S3409).

If it is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode (step S3409: YES), the value of the number of games counter in the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S3410). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the game count of the end standard number of times is executed in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (step S3411). If the value of the number of games counter is "0" (step S3411: YES), the high frequency support flag in the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3412). This results in a situation where the mode is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

Thereafter, information corresponding to the first cycle that enables the launch of 100 game balls per minute is set in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S3413). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the launch cycle area 64b, in the launch control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the launch control unit 78c, the first cycle is set in the launch cycle area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period passes, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game balls to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S3409, when a negative determination is made in step S3411, or when the process of step S3413 is executed, the special figure special electric line counter is cleared to "0" (step S3414). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

With the above configuration, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes the longest second cycle based on the occurrence of a 5R high-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode. This restricted situation is ended when a game round can be executed in the low-frequency support mode. When the restriction situation is lifted, the game ball firing cycle becomes the shortest first cycle. That is, when the type of jackpot result that triggered the start of the advantageous period in which the game round is executed in the high-frequency support mode is the type that is subject to regulation start, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer. The regulatory situation continues as long as the advantageous period continues, and is terminated when the advantageous period ends. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode per unit time of the advantageous period in an advantageous period triggered by a jackpot result, which is the type of regulation start target.

When an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs in the low-frequency support mode, the opening/closing execution mode is started from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to lengthen the firing cycle of the game ball from the start of the opening/closing execution mode that triggered the setting of the regulation situation, and it becomes possible to slow down the progress speed of the opening/closing execution mode.

If the high-frequency support mode occurs based on the occurrence of a 10R low-probability jackpot result in the low-frequency support mode, the above-mentioned restriction situation does not occur. As a result, the above-mentioned regulatory situation will occur under the condition that the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are entered after the opening/closing execution mode, and the regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the gaming area PA is excessive. It is possible to prevent this from becoming a problem.

Even if the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode or the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a small winning result is executed in the low-frequency support mode, the above-mentioned restriction situation does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent restrictions on the number of game balls supplied per unit time to the game area PA even when there is no substantial profit in providing game balls. .

<Ninth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for preventing excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the special figure confirmation process in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by checking whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter in the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether the final stop period of the current game round has elapsed (step S3501). If a negative determination is made in step S3501, the present special symbol determining process is directly ended.

If the final stop period of the current game round has passed (Step S3501: YES), the condition is that the validity determination result that triggered the current game round is a jackpot result or a small win result (Step S3502: YES), execute processing for transitioning to opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, first, an opening period acquisition process is executed (step S3503). In this embodiment, there is one type of opening period, and specifically, it is set to 4 seconds.

Thereafter, the information on the opening period acquired in step S3503 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 64 (step S3504). Thereby, measurement of the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode is started.

Thereafter, an opening command is transmitted to the audio-light side MPU 82 (step S3505). Upon receiving the opening command, the sound and light side MPU 82 starts measuring the opening period and causes the display light emitting section 53 and the speaker section 54 to execute the opening effect. Further, by transmitting a corresponding command to the display side MPU 92, the symbol display device 41 is caused to perform an opening effect.

After that, on the condition that the opening/closing execution mode that occurs this time is the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result (step S3506: YES), that is, the high-frequency winning mode and the highest round On the condition that a number of opening/closing execution modes occur, information corresponding to a second cycle that enables the launch of 90 game balls per minute is set in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S3507). . The second period is the longest firing period, approximately 0.67 seconds. By setting the information corresponding to the second cycle in the launch cycle area 64b, in the launch control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the launch control unit 78c, the second cycle is set. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the second period passes, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotation operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game balls to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the amount of rotation is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the second cycle elapses.

When a negative determination is made in step S3506 or when the process in step S3507 is executed, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is incremented by 1 (step S3508). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the value corresponding to the special electric line starting process.

On the other hand, if the judgment result that triggered the current game round is neither a jackpot result nor a small win result (step S3502: NO), the high probability flag in the main side RAM 64 is "0" and high frequency support is By determining whether the flag is "1" or not, it is possible to determine whether the game is in a low-probability mode with a high frequency after the opening/closing execution mode, which was triggered by the 10R low-probability jackpot result in the game round that ended this time. It is determined whether the game is played in a situation where the support mode is present (step S3509).

If the mode is low probability mode and high frequency support mode (step S3509: YES), the value of the number of games counter in the main side RAM 64 is subtracted by 1 (step S3510). Then, by determining whether or not the value of the game count counter after subtracting 1 is "0", the game count of the end standard number of times is executed in the low probability mode and high frequency support mode. It is determined whether or not (step S3511). If the value of the number of games counter is "0" (step S3511: YES), the high frequency support flag in the main side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3512). This results in a situation where the mode is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

When a negative determination is made in step S3509, when a negative determination is made in step S3511, or when the process of step S3512 is executed, the special figure special electric line counter is cleared to "0" (step S3513). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special figure confirmation process to the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing special call termination processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 62.

First, by checking whether the value of the special figure special electric timer counter in the main side RAM 64 is "0", it is determined whether the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3601). If a negative determination is made in step S3601, this special call termination process is directly terminated.

If the ending period in the current opening/closing execution mode has elapsed (step S3601: YES), a game state transition process is executed (step S3602). The contents of the game state transition process are the same as step S1202 of the special call end process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

Thereafter, information corresponding to the first cycle that enables the launch of 100 game balls per minute is set in the launch cycle area 64b of the main side RAM 64 (step S3603). The first period is 0.6 seconds, which is the shortest firing period. By setting the information corresponding to the first cycle in the launch cycle area 64b, in the launch control process (FIG. 11), if the condition fulfillment signal is continuously received from the launch control unit 78c, the first cycle is set in the launch cycle area 64b. A firing instruction signal is transmitted to the firing control section 78c every time lapses. As a result, the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled every time the first period passes, and the game balls are stored in the upper tray 55a and the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 29b causes the game balls to reach the game area PA. If the amount of rotational operation is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the rotation operation amount is such that the game ball is supplied to the game area PA every time the first cycle elapses.

Thereafter, the special figure special electric line counter is cleared to "0" (step S3604). As a result, the value of the special figure special electric line counter is updated from the value corresponding to the special electric line end process to the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process.

With the above configuration, when the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a jackpot result, which is a type of regulation start target, is started, the game ball firing cycle becomes the longest second cycle. This restricted situation is ended when the opening/closing execution mode ends. When the restriction situation is lifted, the game ball firing cycle becomes the shortest first cycle. This makes it possible to slow down the progress speed of the opening/closing execution mode triggered by jackpot results, which is the type of regulation subject to regulation, and as a result, prevents players from receiving excessively large profits in a short period of time. It becomes possible to suppress this.

In the opening/closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer, and in the opening/closing execution mode, which is the low-frequency winning mode, and the opening/closing execution mode, which does not have the highest number of rounds, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes longer. kept short. This makes it possible to prevent excessive regulation regarding the number of game balls supplied to the game area PA per unit time.

In addition, the opening/closing execution mode in which the game ball firing cycle is set to the second cycle is not limited to the opening/closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode, but can be used as long as it is the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. The game ball firing cycle may be set to the second cycle regardless of the number of times the round game is executed, and the game ball firing cycle may be set to the second cycle regardless of the opening/closing execution mode. Alternatively, the firing cycle of the game ball may be set to the second cycle only in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R high probability jackpot result.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiments described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

(1) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment) The trigger for changing the firing cycle of game balls according to the target ball payout rate (or the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment) and the fluctuation duration of the game round according to the player's advantage. Although the configuration is such that the triggers for changing the determination mode are the same, the configuration may be such that at least part of the triggers are different. For example, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value, one of the game ball firing cycle and the average period of the fluctuation duration of game times becomes longer, while the other is maintained, and the game When the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the second reference value, one of the game ball firing cycle and the average period of the fluctuation duration of game times may be extended while the other is maintained. . This makes it possible to smoothly enhance the function of preventing excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

Also, for example, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the first reference value, one of the game ball firing cycle and the average period of the fluctuation duration of game times becomes longer, while the other is maintained. , when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, one of the game ball firing cycle and the average period of the fluctuation duration of game times becomes longer, while the other is maintained, and the player When the advantage of is equal to or higher than the third reference value, it may be configured such that both the firing period of the game ball and the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times are lengthened. As a result, until the player's advantage level reaches or exceeds the third reference value, it becomes possible to smoothly increase the function to prevent excessively large profits from being granted to the player in a short period of time, and the player's When the degree of advantage becomes equal to or higher than the third reference value, it becomes possible to sharply increase the function of suppressing excessively large profits being given to the player in a short period of time.

(2) The player's advantage in the first to sixth embodiments (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment) Depending on whether the target ball payout rate (the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment) is greater than or equal to the second reference value, the final stop period of the game round is the first final stop period and the second final stop period. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the final stop period of a game round can be switched between the first and final stop period depending on whether the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value. The configuration may be such that the final stop period of the game is switched between the first final stop period and the second final stop period depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value. It is also possible to have a configuration that can be switched between periods.

In addition, in a configuration where another reference value other than the first reference value, second reference value, and third reference value is set, the final stop of the game is determined depending on whether the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the other reference value. A configuration may also be adopted in which the period is switched between a first final stop period and a second final stop period. In this case, the final stop period of the game round will be changed at a different trigger from the trigger that changes the firing cycle of the game ball and the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game round.

(3) In the first to sixth embodiments, the final stop period of a game round is the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c in the second embodiment) For example, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173, or the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment), the configuration can be switched between the first final stop period and the second final stop period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which switching is performed in three stages or four or more stages. In the case of a configuration that can be switched in three stages, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the shortest final stop period is selected, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value, the shortest final stop period is selected. If it is less than the second reference value, the second shortest final stop period will be selected, and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the second reference value, the longest final stop period will be selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the final stop period of a game round is changed according to the player's advantage level will be increased, and the function to prevent players from receiving excessively large profits in a short period of time will be gradually implemented. It is possible to increase it.

(4) The player's advantage in the first to sixth embodiments (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment) The opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is divided into the first opening period and the second opening period depending on whether the target ball payout rate (the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the second reference value. Although the configuration is such that the opening period can be switched between the first opening period and the second opening period, the opening period is not limited to this, depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. Alternatively, the opening period may be switched between the first opening period and the second opening period depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a third reference value.

In addition, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, second reference value, and third reference value is set, the opening period is changed to the first one depending on whether the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the other reference value. It may be configured to be switched between the opening period and the second opening period. In this case, the opening period will be changed at a different trigger than the trigger for changing the firing cycle of the game balls and the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of game times.

(5) In the first to sixth embodiments, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode is the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c in the second embodiment) For example, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173, or in the case of the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive game counter 181) is configured to switch between the first opening period and the second opening period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be switched in three stages or four stages or more. In the case of a configuration in which switching is performed in three stages, the shortest opening period is selected if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, and the shortest opening period is selected if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value but less than the second reference value. If so, the second shortest opening period will be selected, and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the second reference value, the longest opening period will be selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the opening period is changed according to the player's advantage level increases, making it possible to gradually improve the function to prevent players from receiving excessively large profits in a short period of time. becomes.

(6) The player's advantage in the first to sixth embodiments (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment) The interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is divided into the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether the target ball payout rate (the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment) is greater than or equal to the second reference value. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the interval period can be switched between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value. Alternatively, the interval period may be switched between the first interval period and the second interval period depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a third reference value.

In addition, in a configuration in which another reference value other than the first reference value, second reference value, and third reference value is set, the interval period may be changed depending on whether the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the other reference value. It may be configured to be switched between the interval period and the second interval period. In this case, the interval period will be changed at a different trigger than the trigger for changing the firing cycle of the game ball and the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of game times.

(7) In the first to sixth embodiments, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c in the second embodiment) For example, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173, or in the case of the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive game counter 181), the configuration can be switched between the first interval period and the second interval period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be switched in three stages or four stages or more. In the case of a configuration in which switching is performed in three stages, the shortest interval period is selected if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, and the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value and less than the second reference value. If so, the second shortest interval period will be selected, and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the second reference value, the longest interval period will be selected. This increases the number of stages in which the interval period is changed according to the player's advantage, making it possible to step-by-step increase the ability to prevent players from receiving excessively large profits in a short period of time. becomes.

(8) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment) When the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is changed according to the target ball payout rate (or the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment), the interval period included in one opening/closing execution mode is changed. Although the configuration is such that everything is changed, it may be configured such that only some interval periods included in one opening/closing execution mode are changed and the rest are not changed.

(9) The player's advantage in the first to sixth embodiments (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment) The ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is divided into the first ending period and the second ending period depending on whether the target ball payout rate (the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment) is greater than or equal to the second reference value. Although the configuration is such that the ending period can be switched between the first ending period and the second ending period, the ending period is not limited to this, depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. Alternatively, the ending period may be switched between the first ending period and the second ending period depending on whether the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a third reference value.

In addition, in a configuration in which a different reference value other than the first reference value, second reference value, and third reference value is set, the ending period will change depending on whether the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the other reference value. It may be configured to be switched between the ending period and the second ending period. In this case, the ending period will be changed at a different trigger than the trigger for changing the firing cycle of the game ball and the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times.

(10) In the first to sixth embodiments, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode is the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c in the second embodiment) For example, the target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173, or in the case of the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive game counter 181) is configured to switch between the first ending period and the second ending period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to be switched in three stages or four stages or more. In the case of a configuration that can be switched in three stages, the shortest ending period is selected if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, and the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the first reference value but less than the second reference value. If so, the second shortest ending period will be selected, and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the second reference value, the longest ending period will be selected. As a result, the number of stages in which the ending period is changed according to the player's advantage level will increase, making it possible to gradually increase the ability to prevent players from receiving excessively large profits in a short period of time. becomes.

(11) In the first to sixth embodiments, all of the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c, In the second embodiment, the target ball output rate is changed according to the target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173, and in the third embodiment, it is changed according to the value of the consecutive game counter 181, but it is not limited to this. The configuration is such that some of the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are changed according to the player's advantage, while the rest are not changed according to the player's advantage. Good too.

(12) In the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment) The trigger for changing the final stop period of a game round, the trigger for changing the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the opening/closing execution according to the target ball payout rate (the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment) Although the configuration has been described in which the triggers for changing the interval period of the mode and the triggers for changing the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are all the same, a configuration may be adopted in which at least some of these triggers are different. For example, when the player's advantage level exceeds the first reference value, the final stop period of the game is changed to be longer, and when the player's advantage level exceeds the second reference value, Both the opening period and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode are changed to be longer, and when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode is changed to be longer. It may also be a configuration. This makes it possible to smoothly enhance the function of preventing excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

Also, for example, if the player's advantage level exceeds the first reference value, the final stop period of the game is changed to be longer, and if the player's advantage level exceeds the second reference value. Both the opening period and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode have been changed to be longer, and the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode has been changed to be longer if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value. When the player's advantage level exceeds the fourth reference value, the final stop period of the game, the opening period, ending period, and interval period of the opening/closing execution mode are all changed to be longer. It may also be a configuration. As a result, until the player's advantage level reaches or exceeds the fourth reference value, it becomes possible to smoothly increase the function to prevent excessively large profits from being given to the player in a short period of time. When the degree of advantage becomes equal to or higher than the fourth reference value, it becomes possible to sharply increase the function of suppressing excessively large profits being given to the player in a short period of time.

(13) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the longest period may be configured to be the same as the variable continuation period of the longest game time set in the first winning period table. In this case, it is either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, and the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the total round number counter 64c in the second embodiment) If the target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173 (in the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive game counter 181) is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the number of game times that can be selected in other situations is The longest variation duration among the variation durations will be selected.

In addition, it is either the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, and the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target in the second embodiment) If the target ball output rate in the ball output rate area 173 (in the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive game counter 181) is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the target ball output rate in the ball output rate area 173 is set in the first winning time period table. It may be configured such that a variable duration period of a game session to be executed is selected by lottery from a group of variable duration periods of a plurality of types of game sessions that are longer than a variable duration period of a predetermined game session. Even in this case, if it is either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result, and the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the first winning time period table is set. A period longer than the fluctuation continuation period of the predetermined game time is selected as the fluctuation continuation period of the game time. It should be noted that the longest variable continuation period of a game session may or may not be included in the group of the plurality of types of variable continuation periods of a game session.

(14) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, it is either the 10R low probability jackpot result or the 10R high probability jackpot result and the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the total round number counter 64c). value, the target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value, The third criterion is not limited to the configuration in which the longest period is selected as the variable duration period, and the player's advantage is any of the jackpot results that trigger the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. It may be configured such that the longest period is selected as the fluctuation duration of the gaming cycle if the value is greater than or equal to the value, and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the third reference value, the gaming cycle may be changed regardless of the jackpot result. A configuration may be adopted in which the longest period is selected as the fluctuation duration period. Furthermore, the player's advantage, which triggers the selection of the longest period as the continuous period of variation in game times, is not limited to the configuration where it is equal to or greater than the third reference value, and may be equal to or greater than the second reference value. , may be greater than or equal to the first reference value, or may be greater than or equal to another reference value.

(15) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment) The longest period in a game round that results in either a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result in a situation where the target ball payout rate (the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value. The configuration is not limited to displaying the dedicated movie image G2, and the longest period is selected only in a game round that results in a 10R high probability jackpot in a situation where the player's advantage is at least the third reference value. The configuration may also be such that the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period is displayed. In this case, if the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which becomes the high-frequency winning mode, occurs in a situation where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value, and then the high-probability mode occurs, the game Since the duration of the fluctuation is the longest, it will take a long time for the most advantageous situation to occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time. In addition, by displaying the movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period, it is possible to make the player aware that the opening/closing execution mode with the maximum number of rounds, which is the high-frequency winning mode, will occur, and that the high-probability mode will follow after that. becomes.

(16) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, a quasi-maximum period is set apart from the maximum period, and the player's advantage (in the first embodiment, the value of the total number of rounds counter 64c, In the situation where the target ball output rate in the target ball output rate area 173 in the second embodiment, and the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment) is equal to or higher than the third reference value, the 10R low probability jackpot result is determined. In the event that a number of playing times occurs, the semi-longest period is selected as the variation duration of the playing number, and a movie image dedicated to the semi-longest period is displayed, and in a situation where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the third reference value. When a game round with a 10R high probability jackpot result occurs, the longest period may be selected as the fluctuating period of the game round, and a movie image G2 dedicated to the longest period may be displayed. In this case, by setting the quasi-maximum period to a period such as 9 minutes and 30 seconds that is longer than the variable continuation period of the game rounds selected in other situations, excluding the maximum period, the maximum number of rounds that will become the high-frequency winning mode. It is possible to make it take a long time for the opening/closing execution mode to occur, and different effects are executed depending on when a 10R low-probability jackpot result occurs and when a 10R high-probability jackpot result occurs. It becomes possible to do so.

(17) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment) The structure is not limited to a structure in which the fluctuating period of a game session becomes longer depending on the target ball payout rate (or the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the case of the third embodiment), and the average period of the fluctuating period of a game session becomes longer. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the length is long. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which various period tables for determining the variable continuation period of game rounds by lottery are changed according to the player's advantage. In this case, a first table group of various period tables and a second table group of various period tables are provided, and the average of the fluctuation duration of gaming times when the second table group is referred to more than the first table group. Make the period longer. Then, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined reference value, the table group to be referred to when determining the fluctuation continuation period of a game round is changed from the first table group to the second table group. As a result, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined reference value, the average period of the fluctuation continuation period of the game times becomes longer.

In addition, as the above-mentioned table group, a third table group is provided in which the average duration of the fluctuation period of gaming times when referenced is longer than the second table group, and the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. In this case, the table group that is referred to when determining the fluctuation duration of the game session is changed from the first table group to the second table group, and if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the game is stopped. A configuration may also be adopted in which the table group that is referred to when determining the period of fluctuation of the times is changed from the second table group to the third table group. Thereby, it becomes possible to lengthen the average period of the fluctuating period of game times in stages according to the player's advantage.

(18) The player's advantage in the first to seventh embodiments (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment) Depending on the target ball payout rate, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment, or the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment), the fluctuation duration of the gaming session or the average duration of the fluctuation duration of the gaming session. When the time becomes longer, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of occurrence of a game round in which the out-of-reach display is displayed increases accordingly. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable about the lengthening of the continuous period of fluctuation in game times or the average period of the continuous period of fluctuation in game times.

(19) In the first to seventh embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the value of the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment) The firing cycle of game balls is changed to a cycle longer than the first cycle according to the target ball output rate, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment, and the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment. In this case, the changed long firing cycle is applied only in the opening/closing execution mode during the advantageous period, and the firing cycle of the game ball is changed to the first cycle during the period when the opening/closing execution mode is not in the advantageous period. Good too. In addition, on the contrary, the changed long firing cycle may be applied only during a period in which the opening/closing execution mode is not in the advantageous period, and may not be applied in the opening/closing execution mode in the advantageous period.

(20) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the timing at which the display of the remaining time image G3 is started is arbitrary as long as it is after the timing at which the display of the movie image G2 dedicated for the longest period is started. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the display of the remaining time image G3 is started after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the display of the movie image G2 dedicated for the longest period has started.

(21) In addition to or in place of the configurations of the above embodiments, the following configuration may be applied as a configuration for changing the gaming situation according to the player's advantage.

(21-1) As in the first to sixth embodiments, the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate area in the second embodiment) 173, or the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment), at least the firing cycle of game balls during the opening/closing execution mode is changed, the opening/closing execution in the high-frequency winning mode is The configuration is such that one round game in the mode ends when either of the following conditions is satisfied: an open duration period of T seconds passes and Q game balls enter the special electric winning device 32. The firing cycle of the game ball is t1 seconds if the player's advantage is less than a predetermined reference value, and t2 seconds (t2>t1) if the player's advantage is more than a predetermined reference value. In the event that
t1×Q<T≦t2×Q
It may be configured as follows. As a result, if the firing cycle of game balls is not changed to a longer cycle according to the player's advantage, in each round game of the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode, the maximum number of special bullets of Q or more can be obtained. While it is possible to enter the game ball into the winning device 32, if the firing cycle of the game ball has been changed to a longer cycle according to the player's advantage, opening and closing in the high-frequency winning mode is not possible. In each round game in the execution mode, it becomes impossible or difficult to enter more than the upper limit of Q balls into the special electric winning device 32. In this way, by varying the firing cycle of game balls according to the player's advantage, it is possible to vary the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. becomes.

In addition, in one round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode, one of the following conditions is satisfied: an opening duration period of T seconds has elapsed, and Q game balls have entered the special electric winning device 32. The game ball launch cycle is t1 seconds if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, and t1 seconds if the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first reference value. If the player's advantage is less than the second reference value, it will be t2 seconds (t2>t1), and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the second reference value, it will be t3 seconds (t3>t2),
t1×Q<t2×Q≦T<t3×Q,
or t1×Q<t2×Q<T≦t3×Q,
or t1×Q<t2×Q<T<t3×Q,
It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, up to the stage where the firing cycle of game balls is extended by one step according to the player's advantage, Q or more, which is the upper limit number, will be played in each round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode. While it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the special electric winning device 32, the firing cycle of the game ball becomes two steps longer depending on the player's advantage, so that the high-frequency winning mode In each round game in the opening/closing execution mode, it becomes impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the upper limit number Q or more of the special electric winning devices 32. In this way, by varying the firing cycle of game balls in stages according to the player's advantage, the expected number of game balls entering the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode can be changed in stages. It is possible to change the

(21-2) In a configuration in which one round game in the opening/closing execution mode ends when the upper limit number of game balls enters the special electric winning device 32, the upper limit number is the player's advantage (first implementation In the case of the form, the value of the total round number counter 64c, in the second embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173, in the third embodiment, the value of the consecutive game counter 181) A variable configuration may also be used. For example, if the player's advantage is less than the first reference value, the upper limit number is 10, and if the player's advantage is more than the first reference value but less than the second reference value, the upper limit number is 10. may be eight, and if the player's advantage is greater than or equal to the second reference value and less than the third reference value, the upper limit number may be five. In this way, by varying the above-mentioned upper limit number to the special electric winning device 32 in the round game according to the advantage of the player, the expected entry of game balls to the special electric winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode in the high frequency winning mode can be increased. It becomes possible to vary the number of pieces.

(21-3) There are two gates in the gaming area PA that the game ball can pass through, and after the game round that resulted in a jackpot ends, the game ball passes through one of the two gates. Then, the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode for the 5 round game, and when the game ball passes through the other gate, either the opening/closing execution mode for the 2 round game or the opening/closing execution mode for the 10 round game is executed. It may be configured such that the opening/closing execution mode is determined by a lottery and the opening/closing execution mode is selected. In this case, the above-mentioned two gates are arranged in parallel, and the game ball that reaches the area where the two gates are provided is guided to one of the above-mentioned gates with a predetermined probability by a distribution member, etc. is configured to be guided to the gate with a specific probability. In the case where the opening/closing execution mode of the 10 round game occurs in this configuration, the firing cycle of the game ball, the continuous period of fluctuation of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, and the opening period, interval period, and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode. If at least one of the periods becomes longer than before and other opening/closing execution modes occur, a configuration may be adopted in which the lengthening does not occur. In addition, when the opening/closing execution mode of a 5 round game or the opening/closing execution mode of a 10 round game occurs, the firing cycle of the game ball, the continuous period of fluctuation of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, and the opening/closing execution mode If at least one of the opening period, interval period, and ending period becomes longer than before, and another opening/closing execution mode occurs, a configuration may be adopted in which the lengthening does not occur.

(21-4) Player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the third If the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the embodiment, or the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, exceeds a predetermined reference value, the progress of the game is stopped, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 62 is stopped, Decreasing the number of game balls that are paid out in response to a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry section (for example, the general winning hole 31) during the opening/closing execution mode, stopping the progress of the game after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and opening/closing. Transition to the normal gaming state after the end of the execution mode, transition to the least advantageous setting value if there are multiple setting values that determine the player's advantage, and start of the opening/closing execution mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which standby and initialization of the main RAM 64 occur. For example, if the total number of game balls paid out to the player during the advantageous period reaches 12,000, the progress of the game may be forcibly stopped at that point.

(21-5) Player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the third If the value of the consecutive winnings counter 181 in the embodiment, or the advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, exceeds a predetermined reference value, the jackpot result may not be selected in the win/fail determination process. In this case, during the period when no jackpot result is selected in the judgment process, the high-frequency support mode is set and the frequency of balls entering the second operation port 34 increases, so that the player does not have to reduce the number of game balls owned by the player. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second operating port 34, a small hit result can occur with a high probability, and in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the small win result, one or two game balls may be generated. The number of game balls owned by the player may be slightly increased by configuring the ball to enter the special electric winning device 32.

(21-6) The interval period in the opening/closing execution mode may be set to a relatively long period, such as 5 seconds. In this case, by setting the support mode to high-frequency support mode instead of low-frequency support mode during the relevant interval period, even if the interval period is set to a relatively long period, the second operation will not be activated during the relevant interval period. It may be arranged so that game balls enter the mouth 34 with high frequency, so that the number of game balls owned by the player does not have to be reduced so much.

(21-7) As a high probability mode of the win/fail lottery mode, a first high probability mode and a second high probability mode are set so that the probability of winning a jackpot result is relatively high or low, and they are opened and closed during advantageous periods. A configuration may be adopted in which the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode are alternately switched each time the execution mode occurs. In addition, in the win/fail lottery mode, there is one type of high probability mode, and a continuous state is set as a gaming state which is a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, in which the gaming state continues until the next opening/closing execution mode occurs. In this configuration, the high probability mode and the continuous state may be alternately switched each time the opening/closing execution mode occurs during the advantageous period.

(21-8) The configuration is such that it is first specified whether or not the reservation information on the special symbol side stored in the special symbol reservation area 122 corresponds to the jackpot result before the game round is started. If it is specified that the reservation information on a predetermined special drawing side corresponds to the jackpot result in the first identification, the reservation on the special drawing side will be one piece earlier than the reservation information on the special drawing side. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the duration of variation in game times triggered by information is the longest period. In addition, if it is specified in the above-mentioned destination identification that the reservation information on the predetermined second special symbol side corresponds to the jackpot result, the reservation information on the second special symbol side corresponds to the predetermined second special symbol side. The fluctuation duration of the game cycle triggered by the reservation information on the special figure side that is the previous consumption order for the reservation information, and the reservation information on the first special figure side that is stored on hold at that point. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable continuation period of the game times is the longest period.

In addition, if the period of fluctuation of the game round based on the above-mentioned destination is extended for a long time, the reservation information on the special drawing side corresponding to the 10R high sure jackpot result, which is the most advantageous jackpot result, is stored on hold. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the reservation information on the special drawing side corresponding to the 10R low-probability jackpot result or the 10R high-probability jackpot result, which triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode, is reserved and stored. It may be configured such that it occurs when the high-frequency winning mode triggers the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and the reservation on the special drawing side corresponding to the 5R high-probability jackpot result, 10R low-probability jackpot result, or 10R high-probability jackpot result It may be a configuration that occurs when information is stored on hold, and the special figure corresponds to a 5R high-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result that becomes a high-frequency support mode and a high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The configuration may be such that this occurs when the pending information on the side is stored in pending storage.

(21-9) The number of opening/closing times of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game in the opening/closing execution mode may vary depending on the player's advantage. For example, the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed only once in one round game until the total number of game balls acquired by the player during the advantageous period reaches 2000, and when the total number of game balls acquired by the player reaches 2000 or more, In this case, the number of opening and closing times of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is 2, and if the number of opening and closing times of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is 3000 or more, it may be configured such that the number of opening and closing of the special electric winning device 32 in one round game is three times. .

(21-10) It may be configured such that the frequency with which the second operating port 34 is opened per unit time in the high-frequency support mode gradually decreases as the number of occurrences of jackpot results increases during the advantageous period. For example, it may be configured such that as the number of occurrences of jackpot results increases during the advantageous period, the period during which symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the common figure display section 38a becomes longer. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the greater the number of occurrences of jackpot results during the advantageous period, the shorter the period during which the second operating port 34 is in the open state in the high frequency support mode.

(22) The types of player advantage that trigger a change in the game situation are not limited to those in the above embodiments, and the following may also be applied.

(22-1) A predetermined advantageous period has started in a gaming state that is a high probability mode, a gaming state that is a high frequency support mode, or a gaming state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode. The game situation may be changed according to the number of games played until a predetermined jackpot result occurs. For example, if a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 30 games after the start of the predetermined advantageous period, the firing cycle of the game ball, the continuous period of fluctuation of the game time, the final stop period of the game time, and the opening/closing execution mode The target period, which is at least one of an opening period, an interval period, and an ending period, may be longer than before. Thereby, if a predetermined jackpot result occurs early after the start of the predetermined advantageous period, the target period can be made longer.

In addition, if a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 50 games after the start of the above-mentioned advantageous period, the above-mentioned target period becomes the first target period, which is longer than before, and the above-mentioned predetermined advantageous period starts. If a predetermined jackpot result occurs within 25 games, the target period may be a second target period that is longer than the first target period. Thereby, the smaller the number of games played from the start of the predetermined advantageous period until the predetermined jackpot result occurs, the longer the target period can be made.

The predetermined jackpot results mentioned above may be all the jackpot results, or may be the jackpot results that trigger the opening/closing execution mode in the high-frequency winning mode, or the opening/closing by the highest number of rounds in the high-frequency winning mode. It may be a jackpot result that triggers the execution mode, or it may be a jackpot result where the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high probability mode. The jackpot result may be a support mode, or the jackpot result may be a jackpot result where the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode.

(22-2) The winning/failure lottery mode is not limited to a configuration in which the period of high-frequency support mode is an advantageous period, but the period of high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode is an advantageous period. It may also be a configuration. In this case, in the first embodiment, the number of round games that occurred during the advantageous period is measured using the total round number counter 64c, and in the third embodiment, the number of round games that occurred during the advantageous period is counted. The number of times the opening/closing execution mode becomes the winning mode is measured using the consecutive winnings counter 181.

(22-3) The opening period and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode may be configured to vary depending on the total number of game balls paid out. For example, when the total number of game balls paid out reaches 5,000, the opening period and the first stage of the ending period become longer, and when the total number of game balls paid out reaches 10,000, the opening period It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the second stage of the ending period is prolonged. In this case, the opening period and ending period are each longer when the second stage is lengthened than when the first stage is lengthened. In addition, the first stage is extended by adding additional periods to the initial period of the opening period and the initial period of the ending period, and the second stage is extended by adding an additional period to the initial period of the opening period. It may also be configured such that twice the additional period is added to each of the initial period of the ending period.

(22-4) The opening period and ending period of the opening/closing execution mode may be configured to vary depending on the total number of game balls acquired (total number of game balls paid out - total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA). good. For example, when the total number of game balls acquired reaches 2000, the opening period and the first stage of the ending period become longer, and when the total number of game balls acquired reaches 3000, the opening period It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the second stage of the ending period is prolonged. In this case, the opening period and ending period are each longer when the second stage is lengthened than when the first stage is lengthened. In addition, the first stage is extended by adding additional periods to the initial period of the opening period and the initial period of the ending period, and the second stage is extended by adding an additional period to the initial period of the opening period. It may also be configured such that twice the additional period is added to each of the initial period of the ending period.

(23) The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the states in which various periods have been changed are canceled when the high-frequency support mode ends, but also in a configuration in which the states in which various periods have been changed are canceled under the following conditions. good.

(23-1) When the total number of game balls ejected from the gaming area PA after the various periods have been changed reaches the end reference number, the state in which the various periods have been changed may be canceled.

(23-2) In the second embodiment, the state in which various periods have been changed is canceled when the target ball output rate stored in the target ball output rate area 173 reaches the end reference value. Good too. In this case, by setting the end reference value to a value smaller than the first reference value, it is possible to prevent changes and cancellations of various periods from being repeated in a short period of time.

(23-3) A configuration in which the state in which various periods have been changed is canceled when the number of games played without a predetermined opening/closing execution mode occurring after each period has been changed reaches the end standard number of times. You can also use it as In this case, the predetermined opening/closing execution mode may be all opening/closing execution modes, may be an opening/closing execution mode based on a high frequency winning mode, or may be an opening/closing execution mode based on the highest number of rounds which is a high frequency winning mode.

(23-4) The configuration may be such that the state in which the various periods have been changed is canceled when the end reference period has elapsed after the various periods were changed.

(23-5) A configuration may be adopted in which the state in which various periods have been changed is canceled when a situation arises in which a game round can be executed in the low probability mode.

(24) In addition to or in place of a configuration that changes to a gaming situation that allows the player's advantage to decrease when the player's advantage increases, the player's advantage becomes low. It may also be configured to change the gaming situation to one that makes it possible to increase the player's advantage. For example, when the player's advantage is below a predetermined reference value, the firing period of the game ball, the average period of the fluctuating period of the game time, the final stop period of the game time, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval At least one of the period and the ending period may be made shorter than before.

(25) Player advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first embodiment, the target ball payout rate in the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment, the third embodiment) In this case, the value of the consecutive game counter 181, in the case of the seventh embodiment, the advantageous period), the final stop period of the game, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending of the opening/closing execution mode. At least one of the periods may be varied, but the continuous period of variation in game times may not be varied depending on the player's advantage.

(26) A configuration may also be adopted in which the pending information acquired due to the occurrence of a winning in the first operating port 33 and the pending information obtained due to the occurrence of a winning in the second operating port 34 are not stored separately. . Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the pending information on the second operating port 34 side is prioritized and digested, but on the contrary, the configuration in which the pending information on the first operating port 33 side is prioritized and digested is possible. Alternatively, a configuration may be applied in which the information is consumed in the acquisition order regardless of whether it is the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

(27) A case in which pending information acquired due to the occurrence of a winning at the first operating port 33 is subject to a judgment of validity, and pending information obtained due to the occurrence of a winning at the second operating port 34 It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the manner in which the jackpot results are distributed is the same regardless of whether or not the jackpot is the subject of the determination.

(28) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the audio emission control device 80 based on the command sent from the main control device 60, the display control device 90 is controlled based on the command sent from the main control device 60. A configuration may be adopted in which the device 90 controls the audio emission control device 80. Further, instead of the configuration in which the audio emission control device 80 and the display control device 90 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be may be integrated into the main control device 60, or both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. Furthermore, the structure of the commands sent from the main control device 60 to the audio emission control device 80 and the structure of the commands sent from the audio emission control device 80 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

(29) The device on which the game replay operation is executed is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured such that the game reuse operation is performed by the movement of a movably provided decorative member. Often, the game repeat operation may be executed by lighting up a predetermined light emitting section, or the game return operation may be executed by a combination of all or some of the above-mentioned aspects.

(30) In the above embodiment, the stop result corresponding to each game result is displayed on the special figure display parts 37a, 37b, but instead of this, the special figure display parts 37a, 37b may be provided as a defect. Often, a configuration may be used in which a common stop result is displayed on the special figure display sections 37a, 37b regardless of the game result, and the stop results are displayed randomly on the special figure display sections 37a, 37b. As a result, a configuration may be adopted in which it is not possible to identify which game result is the result from the display on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b. In addition, in each of the embodiments described above, in the special figure display parts 37a and 37b, the display of a predetermined pattern is repeated regardless of the results of the win/fail judgment and the distribution judgment, so that the reach display and the reach effect are not executed, and the final Although the configuration is such that the results of the validity judgment and the distribution judgment are notified based on the stop result, the special figure display sections 37a and 37b may also have a configuration in which a reach display and a reach effect are performed, and a game cycle in which a reach effect occurs. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a stop result different from a game round in which a reach effect does not occur is displayed on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b.

(31) The present invention can be applied to other types of pachinko machines and the like different from the above embodiments. For example, in a pachinko machine where an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, the game ball is not supplied to the game area by firing the game ball, but the game ball is dropped from the top of the game area. Pachinko machines in which game balls are supplied to the playing area by moving the game balls into the game area, Pachinko machines in which a jackpot is won when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, Pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, and arranged ball machines. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as , mahjong ball, etc.

The present invention is also applied to a ball circulation type pachinko machine where the game balls ejected from the gaming area are circulated in the pachinko machine without being ejected from the pachinko machine and are supplied to the gaming area again. can. In the ball-circulating pachinko machine, players are not allowed to touch the game balls that are circulated in the machine, and furthermore, it is prohibited to use the pachinko machine based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball entry section. The number of possible game balls is given to the player, and when one game ball is launched into the game area, the number of usable game balls is reduced by one.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines. Further, the present invention can also be applied to a medalless slot machine where information on the number of virtual medals available to the player is used as the gaming value instead of using medals as the gaming value.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, structures corresponding to each of the above embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific structures shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. A profit is awarded to the player based on the occurrence of a profit granting event (the entry of a game ball into any of the ball entry sections 31 to 34, a game round corresponding to a jackpot result) as a result of playing a game. - 34, if the game ball enters any of the above 34 is a profit giving event, the game ball, and if the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is a profit giving event, the opening/closing execution mode occurs). If the entry of a game ball into any of the ball units 31 to 34 is a profit awarding event, the main MPU 62 executes the processing of steps S209 and S217, the payout control device 77, and the game cycle corresponding to the jackpot result. If is a benefit granting event, the main MPU 62 executes the processing of steps S409 to S412);
The player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first and fourth to sixth embodiments, the target ball payout rate in the second embodiment, the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment, A situation determining means (a first In this embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing the processing of steps S602 to S604, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing cycle setting processing, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing period adjustment processing, and the main MPU 62 has a final stop. A function to execute a period selection process, a function to execute an opening period selection process in the main MPU 62, a function to execute an interval period selection process in the main MPU 62, a function to execute an ending period selection process in the main MPU 62. In the second embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing cycle setting processing, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing steps S2201 to S2204, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing period adjustment processing, and a third In the embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing cycle setting processing, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing steps S2601 to S2604, and the main MPU 62 has a function of executing period adjustment processing. A function of executing the period adjustment process in the side MPU 62, a function of executing the process of steps S2901 to S2907 in the main side MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main side MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, the main MPU 62 executes steps S3103 to S3109 and S3207 to S3212. In the eighth embodiment, the main MPU 62 performs steps S3406, S3407, and S3407. a function of executing the process of S3413, a function of executing the processes of steps S3506, S3507, and S3603 in the main MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, since a profit is awarded to the player based on the occurrence of a profit granting event when the game is played, the player should play the game while expecting the profit granting event to occur. Become. In this case, since the subsequent gaming situation is determined according to the player's advantage, it becomes possible to appropriately grant profits to the player.

Feature A2. Target period (in the first to third embodiments, the firing cycle, the continuous period of fluctuation of the game time, the final stop period of the game time, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode, In the fourth embodiment, the fluctuation duration of the game times, in the fifth and sixth embodiments, the average of the fluctuation duration of the game times, and in the seventh embodiment, the average of the fluctuation duration of the firing period and the game times, In the eighth to ninth embodiments, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit granting event can be varied by varying the firing period),
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the situation determining means changes the target period according to the player's advantage.

According to feature A2, in a configuration in which the period required from a predetermined timing to the occurrence of a predetermined profit granting event can vary due to changes in the target period, the subsequent target period is varied according to the player's advantage. Ru. By changing the target period, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit granting event will change, and as a result, the period required from the predetermined timing to the time the profit is granted will fluctuate. Become. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

Feature A3. The situation determining means determines when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (a first reference value, a second reference value, or a third reference value), or when the player's advantage becomes a predetermined advantage (a first reference value). The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the target period is made longer than before when the target period is equal to or higher than the second reference value, the second reference value, or the third reference value.

According to feature A3, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined advantage, the target period becomes longer than before; By becoming longer than , the period required from the predetermined timing until the predetermined profit granting event occurs becomes longer, and as the period becomes longer, the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is provided becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature A4. As the predetermined advantage, at least a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) and a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) having a higher advantage to the player than the first predetermined advantage are set. has been
The situation determining means is
means for making the target period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the first predetermined advantage; or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the first predetermined advantage; In the first embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing steps S1504, S1603, and S1604; in the second embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing steps S2104, S2303, and S2304; In the third embodiment, a function of executing the processes of step S2504, step S2703, and step S2704 in the main MPU 62);
means for making the target period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the second predetermined advantage; or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the second predetermined advantage; In the first embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing steps S1506, S1606, and S1607; in the second embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing steps S2106, S2306, and S2307; In the third embodiment, a function of executing the processes of step S2506, step S2706, and step S2707 in the main MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to feature A3, comprising:

According to feature A4, the target period becomes longer in stages according to the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the player's advantage, the longer the period required from a predetermined timing until a predetermined profit granting event occurs, and as the period becomes gradually longer, profits are not granted from a predetermined timing. The period required to complete the process will gradually become longer. This makes it possible to step-by-step increase the ability to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

Feature A5. Provided with a supply means (game ball firing mechanism 27) that supplies game balls to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined period when a player performs a supply operation in a situation where game balls can be supplied,
The profit granting event occurs based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area. It is configured to
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, wherein the target period is the predetermined period.

According to feature A5, the predetermined cycle at which game balls are supplied to the game area is varied depending on the player's advantage. Then, as the predetermined cycle changes, the period required from when one game ball enters the ball entering means until the next game ball enters the ball changes, and as the period changes, the profit increases. The period required for the grant to be granted will vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

Feature A6. The game repeating operation is started based on the occurrence of a start opportunity, and the said game repeating operation is ended based on the occurrence of an end opportunity, which is considered as one game session, and the said game is performed in each game session. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the reuse operation is executed A display side MPU 92) is provided,
The game control means includes an operation period determining means (in the first and fourth embodiments, a main operation period) that determines an operation execution period (a fluctuation continuation period of game times or an execution period of game times) in which the game repeat operation is executed. The function of executing the processes of steps S601 to S614 in the side MPU 62, the function of executing the processes of steps S2201 to S2214 of the main side MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and the function of executing the processes of steps S2601 to S2601 of the main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment A function to execute the process in step S2614, a function to execute the process in steps S2901 to S2910 in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment, and a function to execute the process in steps S3001 to S3013 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment. (in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3303 in the main MPU 62),
The profit award event is configured to occur after the game repeat operation corresponding to the profit award is completed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the target period is the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period.

According to feature A6, the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period varies depending on the player's advantage. Then, as the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period changes, the period required until the completion of the game repeat action corresponding to the granting of profits changes, and as the period changes, profits are granted. The period required to complete the process will vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the situation determining means varies the manner in which the action execution period is determined by the action period determining means in accordance with the player's advantage.

According to feature A7, when the action execution period of the game repeated action is varied in accordance with the player's advantage, the manner in which the action execution period is determined by the action period determining means is varied. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately grant profits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature A8. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (first to fourth base array tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, a normal period table 191 and a shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, The seventh embodiment includes information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of first to third base array tables 195 to 197),
The operation period determining means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of a type depending on the gaming situation,
The plurality of types of period information groups are set such that the average period of the operation execution period determined by being referred to by the operation period determining means is different,
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the situation determining means changes the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means depending on the player's advantage.

According to feature A8, the type of period information group referred to by the operation period determining means is configured to vary depending on the player's advantage, so that the type of period information group to be referred to is varied. With this simple configuration, it is possible to vary the average period of the operation execution period.

Feature A9. The information storage means includes, as the period information group, a first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment), and the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than the first period information group. At least a second period information group (shortening period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) is stored,
The operation period determining means includes:
In the first game situation (when it is high-frequency support mode and the number of pending storage information on the second special symbol side is less than 2), the operation execution period is determined by referring to the first period information group. (a function for executing the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
In the second gaming situation (in the case where it is a high-frequency support mode and the number of pieces of pending information on the second special figure side is held and stored is 2 or more), the operation execution period is determined by referring to the second period information group. (a function for executing the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
Equipped with
The situation determining means causes the operation period determining means to refer to the first period information group even in the second gaming situation when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage. The gaming machine according to feature A8, characterized in that the main side MPU 62 in the embodiment No. 6 executes an affirmative determination in step S3008.

According to feature A9, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the action execution determining means selects the second period information group whose average period of action execution period is shorter than the first period information group. The first period information group is then referred to. As a result, when the player's advantage level is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage level, it is possible to lengthen the average period of operation execution periods, and accordingly, the game repeat operation corresponding to the granting of profits ends. The period required to receive the profit will become longer, and as this period changes, the period required to receive the profit will become longer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Further, the first period information group that is referred to by the operation period determining means even in the second gaming situation when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage is the operation period determining means in the first gaming situation. This is a period information group referenced by. As a result, there is no need to prepare a dedicated period information group in response to the case where the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined advantage, so the above-mentioned excellent It becomes possible to produce an effect.

Feature A10. The situation determining means varies the action execution period determined by the action period determining means according to the player's advantage (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to fourth embodiments). ) The gaming machine according to feature A6.

According to feature A10, when the action execution period of the game repeated action is varied according to the player's advantage, the manner in which the action execution period is determined by the action period determination means is not varied, but the action period determination The operation execution period determined by the means is varied. This makes it possible to vary the action execution period in accordance with the player's advantage while maintaining the manner in which the action execution period is determined by the action period determining means in a predetermined manner. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature A11. When the situation determining means varies the action execution period determined by the action period determining means in accordance with the player's advantage, the situation determining means may vary the action execution period according to the length of the action execution period determined by the action period determining means. The gaming machine according to feature A10, characterized in that the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment is executed.

According to feature A11, when the motion execution period determined by the motion period determining means is varied depending on the player's advantage, the fluctuation is performed in a manner according to the length of the motion execution period determined by the motion period determining means. will be held. Thereby, it becomes possible to vary the operation execution period so that the provision of profits to the player is made appropriate and effective.

Feature A12. The situation determining means includes:
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the first predetermined advantage, means for lengthening the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means by an additional period (from step S2802 of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment) function to execute the process of step S2804);
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a second predetermined advantage that is higher than the first predetermined advantage, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is set to be two or more natural times of the additional period. A means for increasing the length by several times (a function of executing the processing of steps S2807 to S2811 of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature A10 or A11.

According to feature A12, when the player's advantage becomes high, the action execution period becomes longer than before, and by making the action execution period longer than before, the game rotation corresponding to the granting of profits The period required to complete the operation will be longer than before, and as this period fluctuates, the period required until profits are granted will become longer than before. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Furthermore, the operation execution period becomes longer in stages depending on the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the player's advantage, the longer the action execution period will be in stages, and the longer the action execution period will be, the longer the period required to complete the repeated game action corresponding to the granting of profits will be. The period becomes longer in stages, and as the period becomes longer, the period required until profits are granted becomes progressively longer. This makes it possible to step-by-step increase the ability to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

Further, when the operation period determining means is lengthened stepwise, the natural number is increased when adding a natural number times the additional period to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to a configuration in which multiple types of additional periods are prepared in advance.

Feature A13. When the situation determining means changes the action execution period determined by the action period determining means in accordance with the player's advantage, the situation determining means determines that the action execution period determined by the action period determining means is a first action execution period. A feature characterized by varying the same period from the second operation execution period regardless of the second operation execution period (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments). The gaming machine according to any one of A10 to A12.

According to feature A13, when the motion execution period determined by the motion period determination means is varied according to the player's advantage, the motion execution period determined by the motion period determination means is the first motion execution period and the second motion execution period. Since the configuration is such that the same period is changed from the operation execution period regardless of the operation execution period, it is possible to simplify the configuration for changing the operation execution period.

Feature A14. The game control means controls the game execution means in accordance with a group of operation mode information (a data table for game performance) stored in advance in a specific storage means (sound/light side ROM 83) to execute the game performance operation;
The gaming machine described in any one of features A6 to A13, characterized in that the situation determination means varies the action execution period determined by the action period determination means in accordance with the player's degree of advantage by processing the group of action state information corresponding to the action execution period determined by the action period determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1707 of the sound/light side MPU 82 in the first embodiment).

According to feature A14, by processing the movement mode information group corresponding to the movement execution period determined by the movement period determining means, the movement execution period is varied according to the player's advantage. It becomes possible to vary the motion execution period according to the player's advantage while not increasing the number of motion mode information groups stored in advance in the storage means.

Feature A15. The structure is such that a variable display of symbols is performed in the game repeating operation,
As the display mode of the pattern in the pattern variation display, a high discrimination display mode (slow variation display) and a low discrimination display mode (high speed variation display) are set, in which the distinguishability of the pattern based on the appearance is relatively high or low. ,
As a mode of the variable display of the symbols, after a state in which all the symbols are displayed in the low discrimination display mode continues for a predetermined period, a predetermined picture is switched to a state in which it is displayed in the high discrimination display mode. It has aspects,
The situation determining means varies the action execution period determined by the action period determining means in accordance with the player's advantage by varying the period in which all symbols are displayed in the low discrimination display mode ( The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A14, characterized by a function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1707 of the audio and optical side MPU 82 in the first embodiment.

According to feature A15, by changing the period displayed in the low discrimination display mode, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage, so that the operation execution period is changed according to the player's advantage. There is no need to store information for determining the mode of variable display of a picture corresponding to each pattern whose execution period may vary. Furthermore, when changing the action execution period, the period in which all the symbols are displayed in a low identification display mode is changed, so the display mode of the symbols is modified to correspond to the variation in the action execution period. Even if it does, it will be difficult to give players a sense of discomfort.

Feature A16. Special transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result) (function of executing special electric start processing in the main side MPU 62) Equipped with
The game control means is a means (main side A function of executing the process of step S506 and step S703 in the MPU 62, a function of executing the process of step S1703 in the sound-light side MPU 82),
The situation determining means is configured to set the operation execution period of the game repetition operation that will cause the transition to the special gaming state to a predetermined length when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (third reference value). long-term selection means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S604 of the main MPU 62; in the second embodiment, the process of step S2204 of the main MPU 62) (in the third embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2604 of the main MPU 62).

According to feature A16, when the player's advantage level becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined advantage level, the operation execution period of the game operation that transitions to a special game state becomes longer than a predetermined period. This makes it possible to prevent the period required for the special game state to occur from becoming shorter than the predetermined period when the player's advantage level becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined advantage level, and makes it possible to prevent the player from being given an excessively large profit in a short period of time.

Feature A17. The long-term selection means is characterized in that when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the operation execution period that causes the transition to the special gaming state is set as the longest period among the operation execution periods. The gaming machine according to feature A16.

According to feature A17, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage, the operation execution period of the game reuse operation that causes a transition to the special gaming state becomes the longest period among the operation execution periods. As a result, when the player's advantage exceeds a predetermined advantage, it is possible to reliably lengthen the period required for the special gaming state to occur, allowing the player to receive an excessively large profit in a short period of time. This makes it possible to prevent this from occurring.

Feature A18. Feature A17 characterized in that the longest period is longer than the longest period among the action execution periods that can be determined by the action period determining means when the player's advantage is less than the predetermined advantage. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature A18, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the operation execution period of the game repeating operation that causes the transition to the special gaming state is set when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage. If the period is less than 1, the operation execution period is longer than the longest period among the operation execution periods that can be selected. This makes it possible to reliably lengthen the period required until the special gaming state occurs when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage. It is possible to set the operation execution period to be different from that in the case where the period is less than the period of time.

Feature A19. When the game repeat operation is performed according to the longest period, a notification (remaining time image G3) that allows the player to recognize the remaining period until the end of the game repeat operation is executed. The gaming machine according to feature A17 or A18, further comprising means (sound/light side MPU 82, display side MPU 92).

According to feature A19, when a game repeat operation with the longest period is performed, notification is performed to allow the player to recognize the remaining period until the end of the game repeat operation. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy about the fact that the game repetition operation is not completed when the game repetition operation with the longest operation execution period is being performed. Become.

Feature A20. A predetermined gaming state that is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and has a lower advantage than the special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high-probability jackpot result, 2R high-probability jackpot result, or small win result) ) is provided with a predetermined transition means (a function of executing special electric start processing in the main side MPU 62) to transition the gaming state,
The situation determining means is configured to set the operation execution period of the game reuse operation that causes a transition to the predetermined gaming state to the predetermined period even in a situation where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage. The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A19, characterized in that the gaming machine can have a period of a certain length.

According to feature A20, when the player's advantage is equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the operation execution period of the game repeat operation that causes the player to enter the special gaming state is set to be longer than the predetermined length period. On the other hand, the operation execution period of the game repeat operation that causes the player to move to a predetermined game state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player and has a lower advantage than the special game state, is a predetermined length. It can be a period. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively long operation execution period from occurring and to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature A21. The game repeating operation is started based on the occurrence of a start opportunity, and the said game repeating operation is ended based on the occurrence of an end opportunity, which is considered as one game session, and the said game is performed in each game session. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the reuse operation is executed A display side MPU 92) is provided,
The profit award event is configured to occur after the game repeat operation corresponding to the profit award is completed,
The structure is such that a symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the game repeat operation, and after the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a predetermined stop symbol is displayed for a stop display period (the final stop period of a game session). This is a configuration in which a stop display is performed when
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A20, wherein the target period is the stop display period.

According to feature A21, the stop display period varies depending on the player's advantage. Then, as the stop display period changes, the period required until the game circulation operation corresponding to the granting of profit ends changes, and as the period changes, the period required until the profit is granted changes. do. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

Feature A22. Equipped with special transition means (a function for executing special electric start processing in the main MPU 62) for transitioning the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is advantageous to the player,
The special gaming state includes a first period in which the predetermined profit giving event can occur (the special electric winning device 32 is in an open state), and a second period in which the predetermined profit giving event does not occur (opening period, interval period, ending period). period), including
The target period is the second period (the function of executing the process of selecting the final stop period of the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments, the function of executing the process of selecting the opening period, the process of selecting the interval period) and a function of executing an ending period selection process).

According to feature A22, the second period in the special gaming state changes depending on the player's advantage. Then, as the second period changes, the period required until the first period in which a predetermined profit granting event can occur changes. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player. Further, since the first period itself is configured not to change, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while not changing the expected number of occurrences of a predetermined profit giving event in the special gaming state.

Feature A23. In the special game state, the second period is configured to occur multiple times,
The gaming machine according to feature A22, wherein the situation determining means varies each of the plurality of second periods depending on the player's advantage.

According to feature A23, since each of the plurality of second periods in the special gaming state changes according to the player's advantage, it is possible to increase the number of periods subject to fluctuation, and one second period It is possible to increase the total amount of variation in the second period in the special gaming state without making the amount of variation excessively large.

Feature A24. The situation determining means makes the target period longer than the normal gaming state in an advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal gaming state (from step S3105 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment). A function to execute the process of step S3106 and steps S3108 to S3109, a function to execute the process of step S3407 of the main side MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, a function to execute the process of step S3507 of the main side MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A23, characterized in that:

According to feature A24, the target period is longer than in the normal gaming state in an advantageous period in which the player is more advantageous than in the normal gaming state. As the target period becomes longer than the normal gaming state, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit granting event becomes longer than the normal gaming state, and as the period becomes longer, the profit is earned from the predetermined timing. The period required for the bonus to be awarded is longer than in the normal gaming state. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature A25. There are at least a first transition opportunity (5R high sure jackpot result) and a second transition opportunity (10R high certainty jackpot result) as transition opportunities for the advantageous period,
It is more advantageous for the player if the second transition opportunity occurs than when the first transition opportunity occurs;
The situation determining means includes:
Means for making the target period longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (processing of steps S3105 and S3106 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment) ) and
Means for making the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (the main feature in the seventh embodiment) a function of executing the processing of steps S3108 to S3109 of the side MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to feature A24, comprising:

According to feature A25, in a configuration in which the target period is longer than the normal gaming state in an advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than in the normal gaming state, the advantageous period that occurs due to a transition opportunity with a higher advantage is longer in the target period. Become. Therefore, the more advantageous the advantageous period that occurs due to the shift trigger, the longer the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is granted. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature A26. There are at least a first transition opportunity (5R high certainty jackpot result) and a second transition opportunity (10R high certainty jackpot result) as transition opportunities for the advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than in the normal gaming state,
It is more advantageous for the player if the second transition opportunity occurs than when the first transition opportunity occurs;
The situation determining means makes the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity ( The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A25, characterized in that the main side MPU 62 in the embodiment 7 executes the processing of steps S3105 to S3106 and steps S3108 to S3109.

According to feature A26, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous for the player if the second transition opportunity occurs than the first transition opportunity, the target period in an advantageous period in which the player is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In this case, the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity is longer than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity. As the target period becomes longer, the period required from the predetermined timing until the predetermined profit granting event occurs becomes longer, and as the period becomes longer, the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is granted becomes longer. . This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature A27. The first transition opportunity is to transition to a first special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature A25 or A26, wherein the second transition trigger is transition to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.

According to feature A27, the higher the advantage of the special gaming state that triggers the transition of the advantageous period, the longer the target period of the advantageous period can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature A28. The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A27, wherein the situation determining means cancels the situation in which the target period is extended when the advantageous period ends.

According to feature A28, it is possible to limit the situation in which the target period becomes long to within one advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target period from becoming excessively long.

Feature A29. The gaming machine according to any one of features A24 to A28, wherein the situation determining means does not change the target period set when the advantageous period starts until the advantageous period ends.

According to feature A29, since the target period does not change during the advantageous period, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature A30. A lottery means (a function that executes the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) that determines by lottery whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) based on the occurrence of a lottery opportunity;
A special transition means (starting a special call in the main MPU 62) that transitions the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a transition result corresponding to shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state. function to perform processing), and
In the special game state, the lottery is not performed by the lottery means,
As gaming states in which the lottery opportunity may occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
According to any one of features A24 to A29, the advantageous period is a period during which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without intervening the normal gaming state. gaming machines.

According to feature A30, if a situation advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to continue the situation for a longer period of time.

Feature A31. The situation determining means includes:
Based on a predetermined game history resulting from a game being played, predetermined history information (in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments, the value of the total round number counter 64c, in the second embodiment, the target ball payout rate, In the third embodiment, the information grasping means (the total round number counter 64c in the first and fourth to sixth embodiments; the target ball payout rate area 173 in the second embodiment; In the third embodiment, a consecutive game counter 181),
An information correspondence determining means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S602 to S604 in the main MPU 62, and a cycle setting process in the main MPU 62) that determines the subsequent gaming situation based on the predetermined history information. a function to perform period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62, a function to perform final stop period selection processing in the main MPU 62, a function to perform opening period selection processing in the main MPU 62, an interval period in the main MPU 62. In the second embodiment, the main MPU 62 performs a cycle setting process, and the main MPU 62 performs a cycle setting process. A function to execute a process, a function to execute a period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, a function to execute a cycle setting process in the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment, a function to execute the process of steps S2601 to S2604 in the main MPU 62. In the fourth embodiment, the function executes the period adjustment process in the main MPU 62, and in the fifth embodiment, the process from step S2901 to step S2907 in the main MPU 62. a function to execute, in the sixth embodiment, a function to execute the processing of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A30, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A31, predetermined history information is grasped based on a predetermined game history resulting from games being played, and the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the grasped predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation changes according to the predetermined gaming history, so that it is possible to appropriately grant profits to the player.

Feature A32. The gaming machine according to feature A31, wherein the predetermined history information changes depending on the profit given to the player.

According to feature A32, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information changes depending on the profit given to the player, the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation changes depending on the profit given to the player, so that it is possible to appropriately give the profit to the player.

Feature A33. The profit giving means gives a gaming value that allows playing a game as the profit,
The gaming machine according to feature A31 or A32, wherein the predetermined history information changes depending on the gaming value given to the player.

According to feature A33, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information changes depending on the gaming value given to the player, the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation changes according to the gaming value given to the player, so that it is possible to appropriately give profits to the player.

Feature A34. The predetermined history information is information corresponding to the ratio of the number of gaming values given to the player to the number of gaming values used by the player (target payout rate in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature A33.

According to feature A34, the subsequent gaming situation is determined according to the ratio of the number of gaming values given to the player to the number of gaming values used by the player. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation will change according to the increase in the gaming value owned by the player, so that it is possible to appropriately grant profits to the player.

Feature A35. A second predetermined period (in the first embodiment, a round game) in which the expected value of the profit to be granted is higher than a first predetermined period (in the first embodiment, other than round games, in the third embodiment, other than opening/closing execution mode) , opening/closing execution mode in the third embodiment). Equipped with a function to execute special train start processing),
The gaming machine according to feature A31, wherein the predetermined history information changes depending on the number of occurrences in the second predetermined period.

According to feature A35, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information changes according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period in which the expected value of profit to be awarded is higher than the first predetermined period, the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. It is determined. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation changes depending on the number of occurrences during the second predetermined period, so that it is possible to appropriately provide profits to the player.

Feature A36. The gaming machine according to feature A35, wherein the information grasping means updates the predetermined history information before the second predetermined period ends when it is determined that the second predetermined period occurs. .

According to feature A36, when it is determined that the second predetermined period occurs, the predetermined history information is updated before the end of the second predetermined period, so that changes in the player's profits can be quickly responded to. It becomes possible to change the subsequent game situation.

Feature A37. A supply means (game ball firing mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to the game area (game area PA);
Variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 32) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processes of step S912, step S1003, and step S1107 in the main MPU 62) that executes variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means is switched to the closed state after being brought into the open state; ,
A special transition means (a function of executing special electric start processing in the main side MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A35 or A36, wherein the second predetermined period is a predetermined period during which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state.

According to feature A37, in a configuration in which the predetermined history information changes according to a predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined history information. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation will change depending on the number of occurrences of the predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special gaming state, so that profits are appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A38. The special game state is a first special game state (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high-probability jackpot result), and the number of times that the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state occurs is the first special game state. The gaming machine according to feature A37, characterized in that there is at least a second special gaming state (an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result) that is different from the above.

According to feature A38, in a configuration in which the number of times during which the variable ball entry means is in the open state is different between the first special game state and the second special game state, the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state. The predetermined history information changes depending on the predetermined period. This makes it possible to change the gaming situation in a manner that corresponds to the profit actually awarded to the player, compared to a configuration in which the predetermined history information is changed according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state.

Feature A39. The predetermined periods include a first period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively large (long-term mode) and a second period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively small (short-term mode). exists at least,
The gaming machine according to feature A37 or A38, wherein the second predetermined period includes the predetermined first period but does not include the predetermined second period.

According to feature A39, while the predetermined history information fluctuates according to the number of occurrences of the predetermined first period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively large, the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means changes. The predetermined history information does not change depending on the number of occurrences of the predetermined second period in which the expected number of balls entering the ball is relatively small. This makes it possible to change the gaming situation in a manner that corresponds to the profits actually awarded to the player.

Feature A40. Based on the occurrence of a decision opportunity, a predetermined decision means (steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62) decides whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player (opening/closing execution mode using high-frequency winning mode). function) and
A special transition for shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the determination result by the predetermined determining means becoming a predetermined transition result (5R high-probability jackpot result, 10R low-probability jackpot result, or 10R high-probability jackpot result) means (a function of executing the special power start process in the main MPU 62);
a number storage means (consecutive shot counter 181) for storing information corresponding to a specific number of occurrences;
The number of occurrences is such that the specific number of occurrences increases when the special gaming state occurs or occurs based on the determination result by the predetermined determining means being the predetermined transition result during an advantageous period advantageous to the player. an updating unit that updates information in the storage unit (a function that executes the process of step S2407 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment);
Equipped with
The game according to any one of features A1 to A39, wherein the situation determining means determines the subsequent game situation based on information corresponding to the specific number of occurrences stored in the number storage means. Machine.

According to feature A40, a specific number of occurrences, which is the number of times a special gaming state has occurred based on a predetermined transition result in an advantageous period, is measured, and the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the specific number of occurrences. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation will change depending on the number of times a special gaming state has occurred based on a predetermined transition result during the advantageous period, so that profits are properly given to players. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A41. The special transition means transitions the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the determination result by the predetermined determining means becoming a specific transition result (2R high sure jackpot result or small win result),
The updating means is configured to increase the number of times the specific occurrence occurs even if the special gaming state occurs based on the fact that the determination result by the predetermined determining means becomes the specific transition result during the advantageous period. The gaming machine according to feature A40, characterized in that information is not updated.

According to feature A41, depending on the type of transition result in the predetermined determining means that triggered the transition of the special gaming state, the occurrence of the special gaming state may or may not be reflected in the specific number of occurrences. . This makes it possible to limit the types of transition results in the predetermined determining means that affect the gaming situation to the predetermined transition results, and it becomes possible to appropriately grant profits to the player.

Feature A42. The special gaming state to which the transition is made based on the determination result by the predetermined determining means becoming the specific transition result is the special gaming state to which the transition is made based on the determination result by the predetermined determining means becoming the predetermined transition result. The gaming machine according to feature A41, characterized in that the player's advantage is lower than that of the gaming machine.

According to feature A42, even if a special gaming state with a low advantage occurs, the occurrence of the special gaming state is not reflected in the specific number of occurrences. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine the subsequent gaming situation according to the number of occurrences of special gaming states with a high degree of advantage during the advantageous period.

Feature A43. The configuration is such that no determination is made by the predetermined determining means in the special gaming state,
As gaming states in which the decision opportunity can occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The advantageous period is a period during which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without the normal gaming state in between,
The updating means updates the number storage means so that the specific number of occurrences becomes 0 when the advantageous period ends (executes the process of step S2413 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features A40 to A42, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following functions.

According to feature A43, the specific number of occurrences is measured within one advantageous period. Thereby, it becomes possible to set the gaming situation according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state within one advantageous period.

Note that for the configuration of features A1 to A43, any one of features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A supply means (gaming ball firing mechanism 27) that supplies game balls to the gaming area (gaming area PA) at a predetermined period when a player performs a supplying operation in a situation where gaming balls can be supplied;
The player receives a profit (wins) based on the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means (general winning hole 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area. If the entry of the game ball into any of the ball parts 31 to 34 is a profit-giving event, the game ball is given, and if the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is a profit-giving event, the opening/closing execution mode is given. Means (a function to execute the processing of step S209 and step S217 in the main MPU 62 if the entry of a game ball into any of the ball entry units 31 to 34 is a profit awarding event, and a payout control device 77, corresponding to the jackpot result) (a function of executing the processing of steps S409 to S412 in the main MPU 62 if the game round to be played is a profit awarding event);
Cycle changing means for changing the predetermined cycle (in the first to third embodiments, the function of executing the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62, in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the cycle setting process in the main MPU 62) (in the eighth embodiment, the function to execute the processes of step S3407 and step S3413 in the main MPU 62; in the ninth embodiment, the function to execute the processes in step S3507 and step S3603 in the main MPU 62) and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, since a profit is given to the player based on the game ball flowing down the gaming area entering the predetermined ball entry means, the player is not required to let the game ball enter the predetermined ball entry means. You will play the game while expecting. In this case, the predetermined cycle at which game balls are supplied to the game area is changed as appropriate, and by changing the predetermined cycle, the frequency at which game balls enter the predetermined ball entry means per unit time is also changed. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately provide gaming value to the player.

Feature B2. The period changing means changes the player's advantage (the value of the total round number counter 64c in the first and fourth to sixth embodiments, the target ball payout rate in the second embodiment, and the continuous number in the third embodiment). The predetermined cycle is changed according to the value of the counter 181, the presence or absence of an advantageous period in the seventh embodiment, the presence or absence of an advantageous period in the eighth embodiment, and the presence or absence of an opening/closing execution mode in the ninth embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature B1.

According to feature B2, the predetermined cycle at which game balls are supplied to the game area is varied depending on the player's advantage. As the predetermined cycle changes, the frequency of entry of game balls into the predetermined ball entry means per unit time also changes, and as the entry frequency changes, the period required until profits are awarded changes. I will do it. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

Feature B3. The cycle changing means changes the period when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (first reference value, second reference value, or third reference value) or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (first reference value). The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the predetermined cycle is made longer than before when the predetermined cycle is equal to or greater than the second reference value or the third reference value.

According to feature B3, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined advantage, the predetermined cycle becomes longer than before, and the predetermined cycle becomes longer than before. By becoming longer than , the frequency of entry of game balls into the predetermined ball entry means per unit time also decreases, and as the frequency of entry becomes lower, the period required until a profit is awarded becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature B4. As the predetermined advantage, at least a first predetermined advantage (first reference value) and a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) having a higher advantage to the player than the first predetermined advantage are set. has been
The period changing means is
means for making the predetermined period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the first predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the first predetermined advantage; In the first embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing steps S1504, S1603, and S1604; in the second embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing steps S2104, S2303, and S2304; In the third embodiment, a function of executing the processes of step S2504, step S2703, and step S2704 in the main MPU 62);
means for making the predetermined period longer than before when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the second predetermined advantage, or when the player's advantage becomes equal to or greater than the second predetermined advantage; In the first embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing steps S1506, S1606, and S1607; in the second embodiment, the main MPU 62 has a function of executing steps S2106, S2306, and S2307; In the third embodiment, a function of executing the processes of step S2506, step S2706, and step S2707 in the main MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to feature B3, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B4, the predetermined period becomes longer in stages according to the player's advantage. Therefore, as the player's advantage increases, the frequency of entering the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means per unit time gradually decreases, and as the frequency of entering the ball gradually decreases, profits are awarded. The period required to complete the process will gradually become longer. This makes it possible to step-by-step increase the ability to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

Feature B5. The period changing means makes the predetermined period longer than in the normal gaming state in an advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal gaming state (step S3105 of the main side MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment A function of executing the process of step S3108, a function of executing the process of step S3407 of the main side MPU 62 in the eighth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S3507 of the main side MPU 62 in the ninth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4.

According to feature B5, the predetermined cycle is longer than in the normal gaming state during an advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal gaming state. As the predetermined cycle becomes longer than in the normal gaming state, the frequency of entry of game balls into the predetermined ball entry means per unit time becomes lower than in the normal gaming state, and the lower frequency of entry results in profits. The period required for the bonus to be awarded is longer than in the normal gaming state. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature B6. There are at least a first transition opportunity (5R high sure jackpot result) and a second transition opportunity (10R high certainty jackpot result) as transition opportunities for the advantageous period,
It is more advantageous for the player if the second transition opportunity occurs than when the first transition opportunity occurs;
The period changing means is
Means for making the predetermined period longer than the normal gaming state in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (executing the process of step S3105 of the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment) function) and
Means for making the predetermined period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity (the main feature in the seventh embodiment) a function of executing the process of step S3108 of the side MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to feature B5, comprising:

According to feature B6, in a configuration in which the predetermined period is longer than in the normal gaming state during an advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal gaming state, the predetermined period is longer as the advantageous period occurs due to a shift trigger with a higher advantage. Become. Therefore, the more advantageous the advantageous period that occurs due to the transition trigger, the longer the period required until the benefit is granted. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature B7. There are at least a first transition opportunity (5R high certainty jackpot result) and a second transition opportunity (10R high certainty jackpot result) as transition opportunities for the advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than in the normal gaming state,
It is more advantageous for the player if the second transition opportunity occurs than when the first transition opportunity occurs;
The period changing means makes the predetermined period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the predetermined period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity ( 7. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that the main MPU 62 in the embodiment 7 executes the processing of steps S3105 and S3108.

According to feature B7, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous for a player if the second transition trigger occurs than if the first transition trigger occurs, the predetermined period during the advantageous period in which the player is more advantageous than in the normal gaming state is longer for the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition trigger than for the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger. And, as the predetermined period becomes longer, the frequency of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means per unit time also decreases, and the lower ball entry frequency increases the period required for a profit to be awarded. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to a player in a short period of time.

Feature B8. The first transition opportunity is to transition to a first special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature B6 or B7, wherein the second transition trigger is transition to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.

According to feature B8, the higher the advantage of the special gaming state that triggers the transition of the advantageous period, the longer the predetermined period in the advantageous period can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B8, wherein the cycle changing means cancels the situation in which the predetermined cycle is extended for a long time when the advantageous period ends.

According to feature B9, it is possible to limit the situation in which the predetermined period becomes long to within one advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined cycle from becoming excessively long.

Feature B10. A lottery means (a function that executes the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) that determines by lottery whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) based on the occurrence of a lottery opportunity;
A special transition means (starting a special call in the main MPU 62) that transitions the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a transition result corresponding to shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state. function to perform processing), and
In the special game state, a lottery is not performed by the lottery means,
As gaming states in which the lottery opportunity may occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
According to any one of features B5 to B9, the advantageous period is a state in which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without intervening the normal gaming state. gaming machines.

According to feature B10, if a situation advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to continue the situation in which the predetermined period is extended.

Note that for the configuration of features B1 to B10, any one of features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A supply means (game ball firing mechanism 27) for supplying game balls to the game area (game area PA);
A variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 32) provided to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Variable ball entry control means (a function of executing the processing of step S912, step S1003, and step S1107 in the main side MPU 62) that executes variable ball entry control in which the variable ball entry means is switched to the closed state after being brought into the open state; ,
A special transition means (a function of executing special electric start processing in the main side MPU 62) for transitioning the game state to a special game state (opening/closing execution mode) in which the variable ball entry control is executed;
Equipped with
In the special game state, there is a first predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is maintained in the closed state (other than a round game in the opening/closing execution mode), and a period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. A second predetermined period (a round game in the opening/closing execution mode) is a period in which the variable ball entry means is placed in the closed state and the end condition is satisfied in a situation where the variable ball entry means is in the open state. This is the configuration that occurs,
This gaming machine is
Information grasping means (total round number counter 64c in the first, fourth to sixth embodiments) for grasping a predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of times the predetermined second predetermined period has occurred;
A frequency correspondence determining means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S602 to S604 in the main MPU 62, and a cycle setting process in the main MPU 62) that determines the subsequent gaming situation based on the predetermined number of occurrences. a function to perform period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62, a function to perform final stop period selection processing in the main MPU 62, a function to perform opening period selection processing in the main MPU 62, an interval period in the main MPU 62. a function to execute selection processing of the ending period in the main MPU 62, a function to execute period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment, and a function to execute period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment. A function to execute the processes from step S2901 to step S2907, a function to execute the processes from step S3005 to step S3009 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C1, the subsequent game situation is determined based on the predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of times the second predetermined period in which the variable ball entrance means is in the open state occurs in the special game state. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation will change depending on the number of times the second predetermined period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special gaming state occurs, so that profits can be appropriately given to the player. It becomes possible to

Feature C2. The special gaming state includes a first special gaming state (an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high-probability jackpot result) and a second special gaming state in which the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is different from the first special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized in that at least a state (an opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 10R low-probability jackpot result or a 10R high-probability jackpot result) exists.

According to feature C2, in a configuration in which the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is different between the first special game state and the second special game state, the second predetermined period during which the variable ball entry means is in the open state in the special game state. The subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the predetermined number of occurrences, which is the number of times that the above occurs. This makes it possible to change the gaming situation in a manner corresponding to the profit actually given to the player, compared to a configuration in which the subsequent gaming situation is determined according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state.

Feature C3. The second predetermined period includes a first period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively large (long-term mode) and a second period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means is relatively small (short-term mode). ) exists at least
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the predetermined second predetermined period includes the predetermined first period but does not include the predetermined second period.

According to feature C3, while the predetermined number of occurrences varies depending on the number of occurrences in the predetermined first period in which the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means is relatively large, the game ball entering the variable ball entry means The predetermined number of occurrences does not vary depending on the number of occurrences in the predetermined second period in which the expected number of balls entering the ball is relatively small. This makes it possible to change the gaming situation in a manner that corresponds to the profits actually awarded to the player.

Feature C4. Target period (in the first embodiment, the firing period, the continuous period of fluctuation of the game time, the final stop period of the game time, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode, the fourth In the embodiment, the period of variation in the number of playing sessions (in the fifth and sixth embodiments, the average duration of variation in the number of gaming sessions) changes), so that the period required from a predetermined timing to the occurrence of a predetermined profit granting event increases. It is a variable configuration,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the frequency correspondence determining means varies the target period according to the predetermined number of occurrences.

According to feature C4, in a configuration in which the period required from a predetermined timing to the occurrence of a predetermined profit grant event can vary due to changes in the target period, the subsequent target period is changed depending on the number of occurrences in the second predetermined period. Will be changed. Then, by changing the target period, the period required from the predetermined timing until the predetermined profit granting event occurs changes. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

Feature C5. The number correspondence determining means determines when the predetermined number of occurrences is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value (first reference value, second reference value, or third reference value) or when the predetermined number of occurrences is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value (first reference value). , a second reference value, or a third reference value), the gaming machine is configured to make the target period longer than before.

According to feature C5, when the number of occurrences during the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, or when the number of occurrences during the second predetermined period becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the target period becomes longer than before, and the target period becomes longer than before. As the period becomes longer than before, the period required from the predetermined timing until the predetermined profit granting event occurs becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature C6. At least a first reference value (first reference value) and a second reference value (second reference value) that is larger than the first reference value are set as the predetermined reference value,
The number correspondence determining means includes:
Means (first implementation (a function of executing the processes of step S1504, step S1603, and step S1604 of the main MPU 62 in the configuration);
Means (first implementation (a function of executing the processes of step S1506, step S1606, and step S1607 of the main MPU 62 in the configuration);
The gaming machine according to feature C5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C6, the target period becomes longer in stages according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. Therefore, as the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period increases, the period required from the predetermined timing until the predetermined profit granting event occurs becomes gradually longer. This makes it possible to step-by-step increase the ability to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

Feature C7. The supply means supplies game balls to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined period when a supply operation is performed by a player in a situation where game balls can be supplied,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C6, wherein the target period is the predetermined period.

According to feature C7, the predetermined cycle in which game balls are supplied to the game area is varied depending on the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. Then, as the predetermined cycle changes, the period required from the predetermined timing until the predetermined profit granting event occurs varies. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately granted to the player.

Feature C8. The game repeating operation is started based on the occurrence of a start opportunity, and the said game repeating operation is ended based on the occurrence of an end opportunity, which is considered as one game session, and the said game is performed in each game session. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the reuse operation is executed A display side MPU 92) is provided,
The game control means includes an operation period determining means (in the first and fourth embodiments, a main operation period) that determines an operation execution period (a fluctuation continuation period of game times or an execution period of game times) in which the game repeat operation is executed. The function of executing the processes of steps S601 to S614 in the side MPU 62, the function of executing the processes of steps S2201 to S2214 of the main side MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and the function of executing the processes of steps S2601 to S2601 of the main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment A function to execute the process in step S2614, a function to execute the process in steps S2901 to S2910 in the main MPU 62 in the fifth embodiment, and a function to execute the process in steps S3001 to S3013 in the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment. (in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3303 in the main MPU 62),
The profit award event is configured to occur after the game repeat operation corresponding to the profit award is completed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C7, wherein the target period is the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period.

According to feature C8, the motion execution period or the average period of the motion execution period varies depending on the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period. Then, as the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period changes, the period required until the completion of the game repeat action corresponding to the granting of profits changes, and as the period changes, profits are granted. The period required to complete the process will vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

Feature C9. The number correspondence determining means varies the manner in which the operation execution period is determined by the operation period determining means in accordance with the predetermined number of occurrences (in the fifth embodiment, the main MPU 62 executes the processing of steps S2901 to S2907). (in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3005 to S3009 in the main MPU 62).

According to feature C9, when the operation execution period of the game recurring operation is varied in accordance with the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, the manner in which the operation execution period is determined by the operation period determining means is varied. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately grant profits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature C10. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (first to fourth base array tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, a normal period table 191 and a shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, The seventh embodiment includes information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of first to third base array tables 195 to 197),
The operation period determining means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of a type depending on the gaming situation,
The plurality of types of period information groups are set such that the average period of the operation execution period determined by being referred to by the operation period determining means is different,
The gaming machine according to feature C9, wherein the number correspondence determining means changes the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means depending on the predetermined number of occurrences.

According to feature C10, the type of the period information group to be referred to by the operation period determining means is configured to vary depending on the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, so that the type of the period information group to be referenced can be changed. With the simple configuration of varying the average period of the operation execution period, it is possible to vary the average period of the operation execution period.

Feature C11. The information storage means includes, as the period information group, a first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment), and the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than the first period information group. At least a second period information group (shortening period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) is stored,
The operation period determining means includes:
In the first game situation (when it is high-frequency support mode and the number of pending storage information on the second special symbol side is less than 2), the operation execution period is determined by referring to the first period information group. (a function for executing the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
In the second gaming situation (in the case where it is a high-frequency support mode and the number of pieces of pending information on the second special figure side is held and stored is 2 or more), the operation execution period is determined by referring to the second period information group. (a function for executing the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
Equipped with
The number correspondence determining means causes the operation period determining means to refer to the first period information group even in the second gaming situation when the predetermined number of occurrences is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value. The gaming machine according to feature C10, characterized in that the main side MPU 62 in the embodiment No. 6 executes an affirmative determination in step S3008.

According to feature C11, when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the action execution determining means selects a second period information group whose average period of action execution periods is shorter than that of the first period information group. The first period information group is now referred to where it would normally be referred to. As a result, if the number of occurrences in the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, it becomes possible to lengthen the average period of the operation execution period, and accordingly, the game repeat operation corresponding to the granting of profits The period required to complete the period becomes longer, and as this period changes, the period required until profits are granted becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Further, when the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the first period information group that is referred to by the operation period determining means even in the second gaming situation is the operation period in the first gaming situation. This is a period information group referred to by the determining means. As a result, there is no need to prepare a dedicated period information group corresponding to the case where the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period is greater than or equal to a predetermined reference value, so the above-mentioned method can be implemented while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity. It becomes possible to achieve excellent effects.

Feature C12. The number correspondence determining means varies the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means in accordance with the predetermined number of occurrences (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first and fourth embodiments). ) The gaming machine according to feature C8.

According to feature C12, when the operation execution period of the game recurring operation is varied according to the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period, the manner in which the operation execution period is determined by the operation period determining means is not changed, but the operation The operation execution period determined by the period determining means is varied. This makes it possible to vary the motion execution period in accordance with the number of occurrences of the second predetermined period while maintaining the manner in which the motion execution period is determined by the motion period determining means in a predetermined manner. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Note that for the configuration of features C1 to C12, any one of features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A predetermined determining means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S505 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (opening/closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds due to high frequency winning mode) )and,
The game repeating operation is started based on the occurrence of a start opportunity, and the said game repeating operation is ended based on the occurrence of an end opportunity, which is considered as one game session, and the said game is performed in each game session. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the reuse operation is executed a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the display side MPU 92);
When the determination result by the predetermined determining means is a predetermined transition result (10R low-probability jackpot result or 10R high-probability jackpot result) and after the game reuse operation is completed, the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state. A special transition means for transition (a function for executing the special power start process in the main MPU 62),
Equipped with
The game control means includes an operation period determining means (in the first embodiment, steps S601 to S614 in the main MPU 62 (In the second embodiment, the main MPU 62 performs steps S2201 to S2214. In the third embodiment, the main MPU 62 performs steps S2601 to S2614.) Equipped with
In a specific situation, the operation period determining means determines that the operation execution period of the game recurring operation corresponding to the determination result by the predetermined determining means being the predetermined transition result is longer than a predetermined length period. long-term selection means (in the first embodiment, the function of the main MPU 62 to execute the process of step S604; in the second embodiment, the function of the main MPU 62 to execute the process of step S2204; In the third embodiment, the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S2604 of the main MPU 62.

According to feature D1, in the case of a specific situation, the operation execution period of the game recurring operation that transitions to the special gaming state when the determination result by the predetermined determining means becomes the predetermined transition result is a period of a predetermined length. It will be a longer period. As a result, in certain situations, it is possible to prevent the period required for a special gaming state triggered by a predetermined transition result from becoming less than a predetermined length of time, and to It is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being given to players.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the specific situation is a case where the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a predetermined advantage (third reference value).

According to feature D2, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the decision result by the predetermined determining means becomes the predetermined transition result, and the game repeat operation causes the transition to the special gaming state. The operation execution period is longer than the predetermined length. As a result, when the player's advantage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined advantage, the period required until the special gaming state occurs triggered by the predetermined transition result becomes less than the predetermined length. This makes it possible to prevent players from receiving excessively large profits in a short period of time.

Feature D3. In the case of the specific situation, the long-term selection means sets the operation execution period of the game recurring operation corresponding to the determination result by the predetermined determination means as the predetermined transition result to the longest period in the operation execution period. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2.

According to feature D3, in the case of a specific situation, the action execution period of the game repeating action that causes the transition to the special gaming state when the determination result by the predetermined determining means becomes the predetermined transition result is within the relevant operation execution period. This is the longest period. As a result, in certain situations, it is possible to reliably lengthen the period required until a special gaming state occurs when a predetermined transition result occurs, and excessively large profits are granted to players in a short period of time. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the longest period is longer than the longest period among the operation execution periods determined by the operation period determining means when the specific situation is not present.

According to feature D4, in the case of a specific situation, the determination result by the predetermined determining means that causes the transition to the special gaming state becomes a predetermined transition result, and the game repeat operation that causes the transition to the special gaming state. The action execution period is longer than the longest period among the action execution periods selected when the situation is not specific. This makes it possible to reliably lengthen the period required for a special gaming state triggered by a predetermined transition result in a specific situation, as well as a different operation execution period than in a non-specific situation. It becomes possible to do this.

Feature D5. When the game repeat operation is performed according to the longest period, a notification (remaining time image G3) that allows the player to recognize the remaining period until the end of the game repeat operation is executed. The gaming machine according to feature D3 or D4, further comprising means (sound-light side MPU 82, display side MPU 92).

According to feature D5, when a game repeat operation with the longest period is performed, a notification is executed to make the player aware of the remaining period until the end of the game repeat operation. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy about the fact that the game repetition operation is not completed when the game repetition operation with the longest operation execution period is being performed. Become.

Feature D6. A predetermined gaming state that is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and has a lower advantage than the special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode triggered by a 5R high-probability jackpot result, 2R high-probability jackpot result, or small win result) ) is provided with a predetermined transition means (a function of executing special electric start processing in the main side MPU 62) to transition the gaming state,
The operation period determining means is characterized in that even in the specific situation, the operation execution period of the game reuse operation that transitions to the predetermined gaming state can be a period of the predetermined length. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5.

According to feature D6, in the case of a specific situation, the operation execution period of the game repeat operation that transitions to the special gaming state when the determination result by the predetermined determining means becomes the predetermined transition result is longer than the predetermined length period. In contrast, the execution of a game repeating operation that causes the player to move to a predetermined gaming state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and is less advantageous than the special gaming state. The time period may be a period of predetermined length. This makes it possible to prevent an excessively long operation execution period from occurring and to prevent an excessively large profit from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Note that for the configuration of features D1 to D6, any one of features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Based on the occurrence of a decision opportunity, a predetermined decision means (steps S503 and S505 in the main MPU 62) decides whether or not to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player (opening/closing execution mode using high-frequency winning mode). function) and
A special transition in which the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state based on the determination result by the predetermined determining means becoming a predetermined transition result (5R high-certain jackpot result, 10R low-probability jackpot result, or 10R high-probability jackpot result) means (a function of executing the special power start process in the main MPU 62);
a number storage means (consecutive shot counter 181) for storing information corresponding to a specific number of occurrences;
The number of occurrences is such that the specific number of occurrences increases when the special gaming state occurs or occurs based on the determination result by the predetermined determining means being the predetermined transition result during an advantageous period advantageous to the player. an updating unit that updates information in the storage unit (a function that executes the process of step S2407 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment);
Specific response determining means (in the third embodiment, a function of executing cycle setting processing in the main MPU 62, A function of executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2604 in the main MPU 62, a function of executing period adjustment processing in the main MPU 62),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, a specific number of occurrences, which is the number of times a special gaming state has occurred based on a predetermined transition result during an advantageous period, is measured, and the subsequent gaming situation is determined based on the specific number of occurrences. As a result, the subsequent gaming situation will change depending on the number of times a special gaming state has occurred based on a predetermined transition result during the advantageous period, so that profits are properly given to players. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature E2. The special transition means transitions the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the determination result by the predetermined determining means becoming a specific transition result (2R high sure jackpot result or small win result),
The updating means is configured to increase the number of times the specific occurrence occurs even if the special gaming state occurs based on the fact that the determination result by the predetermined determining means becomes the specific transition result during the advantageous period. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that information is not updated.

According to feature E2, depending on the type of transition result in the predetermined determining means that triggered the transition of the special gaming state, the occurrence of the special gaming state may or may not be reflected in the specific number of occurrences. . This makes it possible to limit the types of transition results in the predetermined determining means that affect the gaming situation to the predetermined transition results, and it becomes possible to appropriately grant profits to the player.

Feature E3. The special gaming state to which the transition is made based on the determination result by the predetermined determining means becoming the specific transition result is the special gaming state to which the transition is made based on the determination result by the predetermined determining means becoming the predetermined transition result. The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized in that the player's advantage is lower than that of the gaming machine.

According to feature E3, even if a special gaming state with a low advantage occurs, the occurrence of the special gaming state is not reflected in the specific number of occurrences. Thereby, it becomes possible to determine the subsequent gaming situation according to the number of occurrences of special gaming states with a high degree of advantage during the advantageous period.

Feature E4. The configuration is such that no determination is made by the predetermined determining means in the special gaming state,
As gaming states in which the decision opportunity can occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The advantageous period is a period during which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without the normal gaming state in between,
The updating means updates the number storage means so that the specific number of occurrences becomes 0 when the advantageous period ends (executes the process of step S2413 of the main MPU 62 in the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following functions.

According to feature E4, the specific number of occurrences is measured within one advantageous period. Thereby, it becomes possible to set the gaming situation according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state within one advantageous period.

Feature E5. The target period (the firing period in the third embodiment, the variable duration of the game round, the final stop period of the game round, the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the interval period of the opening/closing execution mode, and the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode) varies, so that the period required from a predetermined timing until a predetermined profit-granting event occurs can vary.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the specific response determination means varies the target period according to information corresponding to the specific occurrence count stored in the count memory means.

According to feature E5, in a configuration in which the period required from a predetermined timing to the occurrence of a predetermined benefit award event can vary due to changes in the target period, subsequent targets are determined according to the number of occurrences of special gaming states during the advantageous period. The period is varied. Then, by changing the target period, the period required from the predetermined timing until the predetermined profit granting event occurs changes. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

Feature E6. The specific response determining means determines when the specific number of occurrences is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value (a first reference value, a second reference value, or a third reference value), or when the specific number of occurrences is a predetermined reference value (a first reference value). , a second reference value, or a third reference value), the gaming machine is configured to make the target period longer than before.

According to feature E6, if the number of occurrences of special gaming states in an advantageous period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, or if the number of occurrences of special gaming states in an advantageous period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the target period becomes larger than the previous one. As the target period becomes longer than before, the period required from a predetermined timing until a predetermined profit granting event occurs becomes longer. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature E7. At least a first reference value (first reference value) and a second reference value (second reference value) that is larger than the first reference value are set as the predetermined reference value,
The specific response determining means includes:
Means for making the target period longer than before when the specific number of occurrences becomes equal to or greater than the first reference value or when the specific number of occurrences becomes equal to or greater than the first reference value (a function of executing the processes of step S2504, step S2703, and step S2704 of the main MPU 62 in the configuration);
Means for making the target period longer than before when the specific number of occurrences becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value or when the specific number of occurrences becomes equal to or greater than the second reference value (a function of executing the processes of step S2506, step S2706, and step S2707 of the main MPU 62 in the configuration);
The gaming machine according to feature E6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature E7, the target period becomes longer in stages according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state during the advantageous period. Therefore, as the number of occurrences of the special gaming state during the advantageous period increases, the period required from the predetermined timing until the predetermined profit awarding event occurs becomes gradually longer. This makes it possible to step-by-step increase the ability to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

Feature E8. Provided with a supply means (game ball firing mechanism 27) that supplies game balls to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined period when a player performs a supply operation in a situation where game balls can be supplied,
The profit granting event occurs based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area. It is configured to
The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E7, wherein the target period is the predetermined period.

According to feature E8, the predetermined cycle in which game balls are supplied to the game area is varied depending on the number of times the special game state occurs during the advantageous period. Then, as the predetermined cycle changes, the period required from the predetermined timing until the predetermined profit granting event occurs varies. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

Feature E9. The game repeating operation is started based on the occurrence of a start opportunity, and the said game repeating operation is ended based on the occurrence of an end opportunity, which is considered as one game session, and the said game is performed in each game session. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the reuse operation is executed A display side MPU 92) is provided,
The game control means includes an operation period determining means (in the third embodiment, in the main MPU 62 a function of executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2614),
The profit award event is configured to occur after the game repeat operation corresponding to the profit award is completed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E8, wherein the target period is the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period.

According to feature E9, the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period varies depending on the number of occurrences of the special gaming state during the advantageous period. Then, as the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period changes, the period required until the completion of the game repeat action corresponding to the granting of profits changes, and as the period changes, profits are granted. The period required to complete the process will vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

Feature E10. The specific response determining means varies the manner in which the operation execution period is determined by the operation period determining means in accordance with information corresponding to the specific number of occurrences stored in the number of times storage means (in the fifth embodiment, The gaming machine according to feature E9, characterized in that the main MPU 62 executes the processing of steps S2901 to S2907, and in the sixth embodiment, the main MPU 62 executes the processing of steps S3005 to S3009. .

According to feature E10, when the operation execution period of the game repeat operation is varied according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period, the manner in which the operation execution period is determined by the operation period determining means is varied. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately grant profits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature E11. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (first to fourth base array tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, a normal period table 191 and a shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, The seventh embodiment includes information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of first to third base array tables 195 to 197),
The operation period determining means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of a type depending on the gaming situation,
The plurality of types of period information groups are set such that the average period of the operation execution period determined by being referred to by the operation period determining means is different,
The specific response determining means may vary the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means based on information corresponding to the specific number of occurrences stored in the number storage means. The gaming machine described in E10.

According to feature E11, the type of period information group referred to by the operation period determining means is configured to vary depending on the number of occurrences of special gaming states in the advantageous period, so that the type of period information group to be referenced is With a simple configuration of different types, it is possible to vary the average period of the operation execution period.

Feature E12. The information storage means includes, as the period information group, a first period information group (normal period table 191 in the sixth embodiment), and the average period of the operation execution period is shorter than the first period information group. At least a second period information group (shortening period table 192 in the sixth embodiment) is stored,
The operation period determining means includes:
In the first game situation (when it is high-frequency support mode and the number of pending storage information on the second special symbol side is less than 2), the operation execution period is determined by referring to the first period information group. (a function for executing the process of step S3007 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
In the second gaming situation (in the case where it is a high-frequency support mode and the number of pieces of pending information on the second special figure side is held and stored is 2 or more), the operation execution period is determined by referring to the second period information group. (a function for executing the process of step S3009 executed by the main MPU 62 in the sixth embodiment);
Equipped with
The specific response determining means causes the operation period determining means to refer to the first period information group even in the second gaming situation when the specific number of occurrences is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value. The gaming machine according to feature E11, characterized in that the main side MPU 62 in the embodiment No. 6 executes an affirmative determination in step S3008.

According to feature E12, when the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the operation execution determining means generates second period information whose average period of operation execution periods is shorter than that of the first period information group. Where the group would normally be referred to, the first period information group is now referred to. As a result, if the number of occurrences of the special gaming state during the advantageous period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, it becomes possible to lengthen the average period of the operation execution period, and accordingly, the number of gaming times corresponding to the granting of profits becomes longer. The period required for the transaction to end becomes longer, and as this period fluctuates, the period required until the profit is granted becomes longer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Furthermore, if the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, the first period information group, which is referred to by the operation period determining means even in the second gaming situation, is stored in the first gaming situation. This is a group of period information referred to by the operation period determining means. As a result, there is no need to prepare a dedicated period information group corresponding to the case where the number of occurrences of special gaming states in an advantageous period is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value, so the above-mentioned method can be achieved while suppressing an increase in the required storage capacity. It is possible to achieve such excellent effects.

Feature E13. The specific response determining unit varies the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining unit in accordance with information corresponding to the specific number of occurrences stored in the number storage unit (first and fourth embodiments). The gaming machine according to feature E9, characterized in that the main side MPU 62 executes period adjustment processing in the above mode.

According to feature E13, when the action execution period of the game repeat action is varied according to the number of occurrences of the special gaming state in the advantageous period, the manner in which the action execution period is determined by the action period determining means is not changed; , the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is varied. This makes it possible to vary the action execution period in accordance with the number of occurrences of the special gaming state during the advantageous period while maintaining the manner in which the action execution period is determined by the action period determining means in a predetermined manner. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Note that for the configuration of features E1 to E13, any one of features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. A profit is awarded to the player based on the occurrence of a profit granting event (the entry of a game ball into any of the ball entry sections 31 to 34, a game round corresponding to a jackpot result) as a result of playing a game. - 34, if the game ball enters any of the above 34 is a profit giving event, the game ball, and if the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is a profit giving event, the opening/closing execution mode occurs). If the entry of a game ball into any of the ball units 31 to 34 is a profit awarding event, the main MPU 62 executes the processing of steps S209 and S217, the payout control device 77, and the game cycle corresponding to the jackpot result. is a profit granting event, the main MPU 62 executes the processing of steps S409 to S412).
The structure is such that the period required from a predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit granting event can vary due to a change in the target period (the average of the firing cycle and the variation duration of game times in the seventh embodiment). ,
There are at least a first transition opportunity (5R high certainty jackpot result) and a second transition opportunity (10R high certainty jackpot result) as transition opportunities for the advantageous period in which the player has a higher advantage than the normal gaming state,
This gaming machine determines a target period in which the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity is different from the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with means (in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3103 to S3109 and steps S3207 to S3212 in the main MPU 62).

According to feature F1, the target period in the advantageous period in which the player's advantage is higher than in the normal gaming state is an advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity and an advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity. The period is different depending on the period. Since the target period differs, the period required from the predetermined timing to the occurrence of the predetermined profit granting event varies, and by varying the period, the period required from the predetermined timing to the time the profit is awarded varies. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

Feature F2. It is more advantageous for the player if the second transition opportunity occurs than when the first transition opportunity occurs;
The target period determining means makes the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity longer than the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity ( The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that the main MPU 62 in the seventh embodiment has a function of executing the processing of steps S3105 to S3106 and steps S3108 to S3109.

According to feature F2, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous for the player if the second transition opportunity occurs than the first transition opportunity, the target period in the advantageous period in which the player is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In this case, the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the second transition opportunity is longer than the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition opportunity. As the target period becomes longer, the period required from the predetermined timing until the predetermined profit granting event occurs becomes longer, and as the period becomes longer, the period required from the predetermined timing until the profit is granted becomes longer. . This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature F3. The first transition opportunity is to transition to a first special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the second transition trigger is transition to a second special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special gaming state.

According to feature F3, the higher the advantage of the special gaming state that triggers the transition of the advantageous period, the longer the target period of the advantageous period can be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the target period determining means sets the target period to a period corresponding to the normal gaming state when the advantageous period ends.

According to feature F4, it is possible to limit the situation in which the target period is changed to within one advantageous period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target period from becoming excessively long.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the target period determining means does not change the target period set when the advantageous period starts until the advantageous period ends. .

According to feature F5, since the target period does not change during the advantageous period, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature F6. A lottery means (a function that executes the process of step S503 in the main MPU 62) that determines by lottery whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) based on the occurrence of a lottery opportunity;
A special transition means (starting a special call in the main MPU 62) that transitions the gaming state to the special gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a transition result corresponding to shifting the gaming state to the special gaming state. functions) and
In the special game state, a lottery is not performed by the lottery means,
As gaming states in which the lottery opportunity may occur, there are at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state (high-frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
According to any one of features F1 to F5, the advantageous period is a period during which at least one of the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state continues without intervening the normal gaming state. gaming machines.

According to feature F6, if a situation advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to continue the situation in which the target period has been changed.

Feature F7. Provided with a supply means (game ball firing mechanism 27) that supplies game balls to the game area (game area PA) at a predetermined period when a player performs a supply operation in a situation where game balls can be supplied,
The profit granting event occurs based on the game ball entering the ball entering means (general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area. It is configured to
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein the target period is the predetermined period.

According to feature F7, the predetermined period in which game balls are supplied to the game area is varied depending on the type of opportunity for transition to the advantageous period. Then, as the predetermined cycle changes, the period required from the predetermined timing until the predetermined profit granting event occurs varies. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

Feature F8. The game repeating operation is started based on the occurrence of a start opportunity, and the said game repeating operation is ended based on the occurrence of an end opportunity, which is considered as one game session, and the said game is performed in each game session. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the reuse operation is executed A display side MPU 92) is provided,
The game control means includes an operation period determining means (in the third embodiment, in the main MPU 62 a function of executing the processing of steps S2601 to S2614),
The profit award event is configured to occur after the game repeat operation corresponding to the profit award is completed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the target period is the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period.

According to feature F8, the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period varies depending on the type of transition opportunity to the advantageous period. Then, as the action execution period or the average period of the action execution period changes, the period required until the completion of the game repeat action corresponding to the granting of profits changes, and as the period changes, profits are granted. The period required to complete the process will vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

Feature F9. The target period determining means determines how the operation execution period is determined by the operation period determining means based on the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger and the occurrence of the second transition trigger. The gaming machine according to feature F8, characterized in that the advantageous period is different based on.

According to feature F9, when the operation execution period of the game repeat operation is changed depending on the type of transition opportunity to the advantageous period, the manner in which the operation execution period is determined by the operation period determining means is changed. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately grant profits to the player while utilizing the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature F10. A period information group in which a plurality of types of operation execution periods are set (first to fourth base array tables 185 to 188 in the fifth embodiment, a normal period table 191 and a shortened period table 192 in the sixth embodiment, The seventh embodiment includes information storage means (main side ROM 63) for storing a plurality of types of first to third base array tables 195 to 197),
The operation period determining means determines the operation execution period by referring to the period information group of a type depending on the gaming situation,
The plurality of types of period information groups are set such that the average period of the operation execution period determined by being referred to by the operation period determining means is different,
The target period determining means determines the type of the period information group referred to by the operation period determining means in the target period in the advantageous period based on the occurrence of the first transition trigger and the occurrence of the second transition trigger. The gaming machine according to feature F9, characterized in that the advantageous period is different based on the result of the game.

According to feature F10, the type of period information group referred to by the operation period determining means is configured to differ depending on the type of transition opportunity to an advantageous period, so that the type of period information group to be referenced is With a simple configuration in which the average period of the operation execution period is varied, it is possible to vary the average period of the operation execution period.

Note that for the configuration of features F1 to F10, any one of features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A predetermined determining means (a function of executing the processing of step S503 and step S505 in the main MPU 62) for determining whether to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player (opening/closing execution mode with the highest number of rounds due to high frequency winning mode) )and,
The game repeating operation is started based on the occurrence of a start opportunity, and the said game repeating operation is ended based on the occurrence of an end opportunity, which is considered as one game session, and the said game is performed in each game session. Game control means (function to execute the processing of steps S406 to S408 in the main side MPU 62, sound and light side MPU 82) that controls the game execution means (special figure unit 37, symbol display device 41) so that the reuse operation is executed a function of executing the processing of steps S1401 to S1406 in the display side MPU 92);
When the determination result by the predetermined determining means is a predetermined transition result (10R low-probability jackpot result or 10R high-probability jackpot result) and after the game reuse operation is completed, the gaming state is changed to the special gaming state. A special transition means for transition (a function for executing the special power start process in the main MPU 62),
Equipped with
The game control means includes an operation period determining means (in the first and fourth embodiments, a main operation period) that determines an operation execution period (a fluctuation duration period of game times or an execution period of game times) in which the game repeat operation is executed. The function of executing the processes of steps S601 to S614 in the side MPU 62, the function of executing the processes of steps S2201 to S2214 of the main side MPU 62 in the second embodiment, and the function of executing the processes of steps S2601 to S2601 of the main side MPU 62 in the third embodiment a function of executing the process of step S2614),
This gaming machine uses the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means as the player's advantage (in the first and fourth embodiments, the value of the total round number counter 64c, in the second embodiment, the target ball output). (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to fourth embodiments) to vary the period according to the rate of play, or the value of the consecutive game counter 181 in the third embodiment). A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature G1, the operation execution period of the game repeat operation determined by the operation period determining means changes depending on the player's advantage. As the operation execution period changes, the period required to complete the game reuse operation corresponding to the transition to the special gaming state changes, and as the period changes, the period required until the special gaming state occurs. The required period will vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure that profits are appropriately provided to the player.

In addition, when the action execution period of the game repeating action is changed depending on the player's advantage, the manner in which the action execution period is determined by the action period determining means is not changed, but the action period determining means determines the action execution period. The operation execution period is varied. This makes it possible to vary the action execution period in accordance with the player's advantage while maintaining the manner in which the action execution period is determined by the action period determining means in a predetermined manner. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the operation period determining means.

Feature G2. When the period varying means varies the motion execution period determined by the motion period determining means in accordance with the player's advantage, the period varying means operates in a mode according to the length of the motion execution period determined by the motion period determining means. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment is executed.

According to feature G2, when the motion execution period determined by the motion period determining means is varied depending on the player's advantage, the fluctuation is performed in a manner corresponding to the length of the motion execution period determined by the motion period determining means. will be held. Thereby, it becomes possible to vary the operation execution period so that the provision of profits to the player is made appropriate and effective.

Feature G3. The period varying means is
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a first predetermined advantage (first reference value), the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is extended by an additional period (the main feature in the fourth embodiment). a function of executing the processing of steps S2802 to S2804 of the side MPU 62);
When the player's advantage is equal to or higher than a second predetermined advantage (second reference value) that is higher than the first predetermined advantage, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is added to the operation execution period. A means for lengthening the period by a natural number multiple of 2 or more (a function for executing the processing of steps S2807 to S2811 of the main MPU 62 in the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, comprising:

According to feature G3, when the player's advantage becomes high, the action execution period becomes longer than before, and by making the action execution period longer than before, the game repetition corresponding to the granting of profits The period required to complete the operation will be longer than before, and as this period fluctuates, the period required until profits are granted will become longer than before. This makes it possible to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to the player in a short period of time.

Furthermore, the operation execution period becomes longer in stages depending on the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the player's advantage, the longer the action execution period will be in stages, and the longer the action execution period will be, the longer the period required to complete the repeated game action corresponding to the granting of profits will be. The period becomes longer in stages, and as the period becomes longer, the period required until profits are granted becomes progressively longer. This makes it possible to step-by-step increase the ability to prevent excessively large profits from being awarded to players in a short period of time.

Further, when the operation period determining means is lengthened stepwise, the natural number is increased when adding a natural number times the additional period to the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity compared to a configuration in which multiple types of additional periods are prepared in advance.

Feature G4. When the period variation means changes the motion execution period determined by the motion period determination means according to the player's advantage, the period variation means determines that the motion execution period determined by the motion period determination means is a first motion execution period. A feature characterized by varying the same period from the second operation execution period regardless of the second operation execution period (a function of executing the period adjustment process of the main MPU 62 in the first to third embodiments). The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G3.

According to feature G4, when the action execution period determined by the action period determining means is varied according to the player's advantage, the action execution period determined by the action period determining means is the first action execution period and the second action execution period. Since the configuration is such that the same period is changed from the operation execution period regardless of the operation execution period, it is possible to simplify the configuration for changing the operation execution period.

Feature G5. The game control means executes the game replay operation by controlling the game execution means according to a group of operation mode information (data table for game replay) stored in advance in a specific storage means (sound/light side ROM 83). The purpose is to ensure that
The period varying means varies the motion execution period according to the player's advantage by processing the motion mode information group corresponding to the motion execution period determined by the motion period determining means (first The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that the sound/light side MPU 82 in the embodiment executes the processing of step S1706 and step S1707.

According to feature G5, by processing the movement mode information group corresponding to the movement execution period determined by the movement period determining means, the movement execution period is varied according to the player's advantage, so that the movement execution period can be changed according to the player's advantage. It becomes possible to vary the motion execution period according to the player's advantage while not increasing the number of motion mode information groups stored in advance in the storage means.

Feature G6. The structure is such that a variable display of symbols is performed in the game repeating operation,
As the display mode of the pattern in the pattern variation display, a high discrimination display mode (slow variation display) and a low discrimination display mode (high speed variation display) are set, in which the distinguishability of the pattern based on the appearance is relatively high or low. ,
As a mode of the variable display of the symbols, after a state in which all the symbols are displayed in the low discrimination display mode continues for a predetermined period, a state is switched to a state in which a predetermined picture is displayed in the high discrimination display mode. It has aspects,
The period varying means varies the action execution period determined by the action period determining means in accordance with the player's advantage by varying the period in which all the symbols are displayed in the low discrimination display mode ( The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized by a function of executing the processing of step S1706 and step S1707 of the audio and optical side MPU 82 in the first embodiment.

According to feature G6, by changing the period displayed in the low discrimination display mode, the operation execution period determined by the operation period determining means is changed according to the player's advantage, so that the operation execution period is changed according to the player's advantage. There is no need to store information for determining the mode of variable display of a picture corresponding to each pattern whose execution period may vary. Furthermore, when changing the action execution period, the period in which all the symbols are displayed in a low identification display mode is changed, so the display mode of the symbols is modified to correspond to the variation in the action execution period. Even if it does, it will be difficult to give players a sense of discomfort.

Note that for the configuration of features G1 to G6, any one of features A1 to A43, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C12, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F10, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the features of the above feature A group, the above feature B group, the above feature C group, the above feature D group, the above feature E group, the above feature F group, and the above feature G group, the following problems can be solved. is possible.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Further, a general configuration is such that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding pachinko machines, a lottery is held based on the entry of a game ball into a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, and a fluctuating pattern is displayed on the display surface of the display device. A known configuration is known in which, when a winning result is obtained, a specific combination of symbols, etc. is finally displayed on the display screen, and a special gaming state advantageous to the player is entered. When the state shifts to the special game state, for example, a ball entering device provided in the gaming area starts to open and close, and game balls are paid out based on balls entering the ball entering device.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is preferable that a moderate amount of profit be given to the player, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device that variably displays a plurality of symbols, the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the variable display of the plurality of symbols is started due to the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after the display is stopped or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a bonus is given to a player according to the symbols after the stoppage.

10... Pachinko machine, 27... Game ball firing mechanism, 31... General winning port, 32... Special electric winning device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 37... Special figure unit, 41... Symbol display device, 62...Main side MPU, 63...Main side ROM, 64...Main side RAM, 64c...Total round number counter, 77...Payout control device, 82...Sound and light side MPU, 83...Sound and light side ROM, 92...Display side MPU , 173... Target ball payout rate area, 181... Consecutive game counter, 185... First base arrangement table, 186... Second base arrangement table, 187... Third base arrangement table, 188... Fourth base arrangement table, 191... Normal 192... Shortening period table, 195... First base array table, 196... Second base array table, 197... Third base array table, G3... Remaining time image.

Claims (1)

a profit granting means that grants a profit to a player based on the occurrence of a profit granting event as a result of playing a game;
situation determining means for determining subsequent gaming situations according to the player's advantage;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images